JP2018086578A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing reduction of an interest.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a reception hole 2101 capable of receiving game balls; and lottery means capable of executing a lottery on the basis of reception of game balls in the reception hole 2101. A jackpot game which is advantageous to a player is executed on the basis of a fact that a lottery result is a specific result. The game machine further comprises a liquid crystal display device 1900 on which the lottery result is displayed by a stop mode when patterns are stopped. In a period since variation of the plural patterns is started until the lottery result is displayed, a pseudo continuous performance for temporarily stopping the plural patterns and starting again variation of the temporarily stopped plural patterns, and a fake pseudo continuous performance for temporarily stopping only a specific pattern and starting again variation of the temporarily stopped specific pattern can be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, a gaming machine is known in which when a game ball wins a start opening, a win for a big hit is drawn, and an effect image corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like.

  In this type of gaming machine, based on the result of the lottery, a symbol variation display and an expected effect using a character are performed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device. As an example of such an expected effect, there is a so-called pseudo-continuous effect in which a symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed and then changed again (see, for example, paragraphs [0007] and [0017] of Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-278945 A

  However, when the expected production represented by the above-described pseudo-continuous production is finished in a short time, the expectation is lost at that time. On the other hand, when the expectation degree of winning the lottery is high, it takes a long time. For players who want to know the results of the lottery as soon as possible, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. In particular, when the fact that the lottery result is lost is displayed even though the expected performance has been performed for a long time, the interest is greatly reduced.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the game machine which can suppress the fall of interest.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an entrance capable of accepting a game ball and lottery means capable of performing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the entrance, and the result of the lottery is a specific result. A gaming machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to a player is executed based on a certain thing,
An effect image including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and display means for displaying a result of the lottery according to a stop mode when the symbol is stopped,
The effect image displayed on the display means is controlled, and the plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. Production control means having pseudo continuous production execution means capable of executing a pseudo continuous production to restart the change of the plurality of stopped symbols again,
The production control means includes
Temporarily stopping only a specific symbol between the start of variation of the plurality of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery, and changing the plurality of symbols even after the specific symbol is temporarily stopped Having continuous production execution means,
A special stage effect configured such that the degree of expectation that the result of the lottery is a specific result varies depending on the stage, and the variation period of the plurality of symbols and the specific symbol before the specific symbol is temporarily stopped The special stage effect can be executed in the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols after being temporarily stopped,
The special symbol is temporarily suspended in a special stage effect that has a higher degree of expectation than the stage of the special stage effect performed in the variation period of the plurality of symbols before the specific symbol is temporarily stopped. It can be executed by using a region that overlaps the region where the specific symbol is temporarily stopped in a later variation period of the plurality of symbols.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board of FIG. 8 and was seen from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 17. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a start opening prize. It is a figure which shows an example of a start opening prize control data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory prefetch process. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to notice permission determination data, (A) is a notice permission determination data address table, (B) is an example of notice permission determination data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to a special symbol reservation ball number command, (A) is a special symbol reservation ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection determination process. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the variation pattern selection determination process of FIG. 29. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of gate passage. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetch determination prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process per normal symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of a random number extraction range in time series order. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a figure explaining the example of a production of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of quasi-continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of quasi-continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of special pseudo continuation variation. It is an example of a lottery table used for a special symbol variation pattern setting process and a variation type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a certain pseudo | simulation continuous effect lottery. テ ー ブ ル A table used for pseudo-continuous effect lottery, (a) table for variation type 10H, (b) table for variation type 11H, (c) table for variation type 12H, (d) for variation type 13H It is a table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change process. It is a time chart for explaining a step-up effect, (a) a time chart for explaining an expectation degree related to a step-up effect, (b) a pseudo continuous variation, a pseudo continuous variation, and a pseudo / 贋 pseudo continuous variation. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between each fluctuation | variation and step-up effect. It is a figure which shows an example which shows the production | presentation aspect when pseudo | simulation continuous variation is performed. It is a figure which shows an example which shows the production | presentation aspect when a certain pseudo | simulation continuous variation is performed. It is a figure which shows an example which shows the production | presentation aspect at the time of pseudo | simulation and 贋 pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation being performed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure prefetch effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetching effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous prefetch effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous prefetch effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous prefetching effect aspect selection table for selecting the aspect (specific effect) of a continuous prefetching effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of a continuous prefetch effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of an ordinary figure prefetch effect process. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetching effect. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. FIG. 17 is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and the command modification of “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of the table which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory | storage prefetch process of a modification. FIG. 29A is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table. FIG. 29B is a reach corresponding to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an executable table. (A) is an example of a table showing conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modification prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to Modification 1. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch prohibition count process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 1. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown input flag setting process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in a received command analysis process according to Modification 2; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in a probable change time short state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production mode transfer process performed by the periphery control MPU450a.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed and opened on the front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and the front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are on the player side And a door frame 5 pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 stores a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball disposed below the gaming window 101. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 that a player operates to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 It is equipped with.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view, and the horizontal widths in the horizontal directions are substantially the same. The size of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than that of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in front view, and projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. In this way, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. The game balls and obstacle nails in the area 1100, various winning holes and bonuses cannot be touched.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of 10, 11, 12, and 13 and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 with the connecting member 14 to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. Note that an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light metal molds (for example, aluminum alloys) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be opened and closed. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644, the main body frame 3 can be simply mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 in the support hole 20c. It can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of a locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 that are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into a game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball, and when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end portion of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 through which the inside of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and the main body frame A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed backward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 And. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. Yes. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 that extends leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the ball hitting device 650 from the upper end of the shot rail 660. It is like that. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening and the left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating the through hole. The opening portion of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The 800 main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like that. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are respectively attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. Portion 632, a shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in front view (FIG. 7). And the door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the up-down direction, and the front end of the front extension 632 hangs downward from the front end and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support 630, the attachment portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is provided. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-like front extension 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension 642b, and the front And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end portion of the extension portion 642b when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward and downward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A front extending portion 644b that protrudes, and a main body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion and a front extension portion 644b by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension part 642b and the front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment part of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protruding piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21, so that the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. It is like that.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. 5 is mounted on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft bracket 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft bracket 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the pivotal support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is mounted so that the metal plate launch base 652 is mounted at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600, and the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward from the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined movement path of the tip 658 A firing rail 660 extending diagonally to the upper left when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652, and a tip 658 at the tip of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 and the top of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time. 662 and a stopper for restricting the ball hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the ball stopper piece 662 can be hit. 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the hitting ball basket 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654, and a gentle arc extending from the fixed portion 656a, and the tip is centered on the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launcher 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located below and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a predetermined payout instruction. To pay out. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front, A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the rail 731; a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet; It is equipped with. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a predetermined width that communicates with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width that is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that opens into the left side of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape and communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the rear side of the distribution space, and the right side of the rear side of the distribution space (Axis support side) A ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is meshed with the first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and disposed behind the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear that rotates together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the third gear. A rotation detecting board having a plurality of detection slits (three in the present embodiment) formed at intervals, a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage A counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752 are held. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator has three recesses of a size that can accommodate the respective game balls at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotator rotates, one game ball is supplied from the supply passage. It is accommodated in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board, and correspond to between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The award ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the award ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removal passage. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end. The full branching unit 770 opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the award of the prize ball device 740 is obtained. A prize ball receiving hole for a game ball flowing down the ball passage, a branching space that is arranged below the prize ball receiving hole and extends in the left-right direction, and a game from directly under the prize ball receiving hole in the branching space to the front side A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opened at the front right end of the front view, and the right side in the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball from the raised position to the front side, and a full ball exit 776 that discharges the game ball that has circulated through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left in front of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 includes a ball receiving port that receives a game ball that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper portion when viewed from the front and flows down the ball passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball receiving portion. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball exit 776 And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side upper end of the main body frame base ball passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When a game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, The game balls that can no longer come out to the side of the tray 301 stagnate in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fill up the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved in the horizontal direction is full. So as to enter the tongue passage and be supplied from the full bulb exit to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage, and the second bulb outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the substrate unit base 810, and a substrate. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear face of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front. And board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 downward from the left and right front in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and the front of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) is opened forward and upward. A power supply board box holder 840 having a box housing portion that is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side and can accommodate the front end of the power board board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is circulated through the main body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. It has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. A power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Further, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that an operation switch 860a (error release unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is reported, it is operated to cancel the error, and the RAM clearing function at power-on and the power-on (time period for functioning as RAM clearing have elapsed) And a function of canceling an error in (after). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed with a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, so that peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connection with a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face the front side of the main body frame base 600, Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the front side of the relay terminal plate cover 692. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. It should be noted that the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each decorative unit 200, 240, 280 and the decorative unit provided in the plate unit 300 or the operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial operation, and the like. The various switches that detect the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side facing the right side decoration unit 200 and attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100.

  The door frame 5 is attached to the right side of the dish unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner portion of the door frame base unit 100 through the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base unit 100 is sandwiched therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540; Installed to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the base unit 100 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 and fixes the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. The speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1), and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. A main control board mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided in a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. A handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection to the 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (on the right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. In addition, the wiring for electrically connecting the switch, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being bundled together at the right side (axial support side) position, it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been. The gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a rectangular notch that allows insertion of the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, a right side (open side) end of the front surface disposed at the lower right corner portion in front view and bulging forward The handle mounting portion for tilting the handle bracket to tilt backward, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. Thus, a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. Side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. Integrated. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that contacts the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear side of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The tray unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are shot through the ball feeding unit. Can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and forward straightly from the center to the right. Protrusively formed. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when a player presses the portion downward with a hand, the upper plate 314d bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the hand on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. In addition, when the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302 in response to an operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and a lower dish ball removal button 354. The lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 in accordance with the operation of the lower tray ball through the lower tray ball removing hole 324b and the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not shown. A ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The operation unit 400 has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a press operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. Operation part), and can accept the player's operation according to the gaming state, or the dial operation part 401 can be moved, not only the game ball driving operation to the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating in reverse.

[4-2-2. Rental unit]
The lending unit 360 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is attached to the inside of the ball rental unit 360. . When the ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a cash or prepaid card and the ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit. 300 can be lent out (paid out) into the top plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the remaining cash or prepaid card is returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball transport unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan 302 by operating the upper pan ball release button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an intrusion port in which game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball opening that opens below the intrusion opening and is open at the rear, and a box-like shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction The rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the intrusion port of the front cover to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning portion for partitioning between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member are hit one by one on the rear cover. Up and down between the front cover and the rear cover before feeding to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, is cylindrical, and has a handle base whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. Arranged at the front of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and being rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the shaft member bearing portion is fitted. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated together and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base and A switch support member having a through-hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member; A single-shot button that is pivotally supported with respect to the switch support member and operates the firing stop switch 518. And a handle that is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urges the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, it is rotated from the original rotational position to the limit rotational position (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the front part 506 of the rotary handle and the rear part of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, so that the rotary handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch intensity corresponding to (a match with) the rotation angle of the front of the main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle. Yes.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is played by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball hitting device 650 though it has been shot. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base that communicates with the first sphere inlet and expands to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, and communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base And a second sphere inlet 542c that extends downward and is inclined toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. Note that the second ball passage in the cover base has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end being approximately three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and has a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. And a ball passage. In addition, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second bulb entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening / closing the shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet, and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to an upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through a notch portion of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower tray ball supply bowl in the tray unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet through the ball passage opening of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet to the dish unit 300 through the first ball passage. It can supply to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply basket and the lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device When the game ball launched by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, the game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be swingable by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The swinging member is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base, and the upper end is rotated to the left when viewed from the front. It comes to form. Further, the swing member is biased to a position where the swing member is in a substantially vertical state by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines an outer periphery, and a position that is visible from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front of the front component member 1110 And a plurality of openings 1158 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 and attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100. A plate-like gaming panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150, and a gaming panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light-emitting decorative holes that penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and that can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the gaming state, and a lower part of the back unit 3000 Is provided with a board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and has an inner shape that penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise from the front and opens the outer rail 1111. And a backflow preventing member 1116 biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the front component member 1110 is in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is a launch rail 660 in the hitting ball launcher 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). )). Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, if the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received by the start opening 2101, 2102 or the winning opening 2103, 2104, 2201, etc. of the table unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, The out-port guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 is guided to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the out-port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1 (see FIG. 1) is dropped and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located below the foul space 626. It is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is alleviated. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end when viewed from the front, is recessed from the front to the rear and is opened at the left end, and is spaced apart from the right end when viewed from the front in the vertical direction. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and opened downward, and has an arcuate upper side and recessed from the front side, and a lower end of the front view , And a ball passage cutout 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, thereby allowing the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5). It is possible to restrict the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view from moving in the front-rear direction. The game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is connected to the game board. By locking to the stop portion, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 has a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 5) is inserted into the game board fixing tool 690, and the game board fixing tool 690 allows the game board 4 to be inserted. The lower end of the head is restricted from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front component member 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 includes an attacker unit 2100 that is disposed at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the gaming area 1100 and above the out port 1151 and is supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. And a side prize opening member 2200 supported along the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed approximately at the center of the gaming area 1100 and supported by the gaming panel 1150. Yes.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the gaming area 1100 in the gaming panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is positioned in the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, Can be changed. The table unit 2000 can decorate the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The start port 2101, the lower start port 2102 disposed below the upper start port 2101, and the rectangular disposed below the lower start port 2102 and greatly extending in the left-right direction than the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received in the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the big winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side.

  The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) is disposed between the lower start port 2102 arranged below the upper start port 2101 and the upper start port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 rises substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 In a state where the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. That is, the lower start port 2102 is a variable winning port (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is pivotally supported at its lower side so that in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when a game ball is received (starts winning) into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), it opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99), and a variable prize opening (variable prize winning device) Is configured.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the big winning port 2103. The game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper start port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side prize opening member]
Next, the side prize opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1150 and facing each other along the outer periphery of the gaming area 1100 so as to line up with the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the front view in the attacker unit 2100 A general winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general winning holes 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times, and the game balls received in the general winning holes 2201 are guided from the front side of the game panel 1150 to the rear side. Then, it is detected by a general prize opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2200, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower start opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100) A second shelf 2203 that becomes lower toward the game area 1100), and the first shelf 2202 can bring the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 toward the center of the game area 1100. It can be done.

  The two general winning ports 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. A third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2201.

  The side prize port member 2200 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decorative board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side prize opening member 2200. Can be decorated with light emission.

[5-2-3. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front is in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer periphery of the game area 1100 The left outer peripheral surface is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region with a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game region 1100 and the outer periphery.

  The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down to the left of the center accessory 2300, and on the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls that have flowed down (invaded) flow down to the lower part of the game area 1100 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. In other words, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered a warp inlet 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 and the warp inlet 2302. A warp exit (not shown) that releases the game ball into the frame, and a game ball released from the warp exit rolls in the left-right direction, and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame in 2300.

  Although the detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the game ball released from the warp outlet is supplied, and the game ball is placed from the first stage on the front side of the first stage. And a second stage that is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. This stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed at the rear side of the center of the first stage in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance in front of the lowermost end of the center accessory 2300. The game is discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received (wins) with high probability by the upper start opening 2101. ing.

  The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 is visible from the player side. It has become.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is a transparent member extending leftward so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. An arch portion 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315. .

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a game entrance that is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate outlet of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is The portion 2315 can be seen as if diving.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light emitting elements formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the gaming area 1100 of the gaming panel 1150. The decorative hole is used for luminescent decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear side of the lower panel lens 2520. And a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that have substantially the same shape as the light emitting decoration hole to be inserted. Department. In a state where the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. The ball is not affected as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the game ball flows even if an opaque game panel 1150 such as a veneer plywood is used by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition to being able to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150 that has never been seen before, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be conspicuous and differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 disposed on the upper side of the device 1900, the character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and the gear decoration disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. And a body unit 3500.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A side lamp decoration board 3014 and a game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200, and a game received in the left general winning port 2104 in the attacker unit 2100 A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right guiding the game ball disposed on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and received in the upper start port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the attacker unit 2100. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed in the lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally-long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp drive board 4170, and a lower part of the lamp drive board box 3423. The motor drive board box 3430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed on the side and accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 are arranged on the left side when viewed from the rear. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally-long rectangular upper resistance substrate disposed at the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900. Are further provided.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 can move independently or in conjunction with each other depending on the gaming state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a game or a chance, and to entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing parts 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the fixing parts 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through this opening can be viewed from the player side. Further, the back box 3001 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks one fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the right of the opening in the rear view (right side in the rear view). A liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening in the rear view. The other fixing piece 1902 (left side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is supported by the lock member. A display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning port 2201 of the side winning port member 2200 and the general winning port 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths. Each of the flow paths is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 on the attacker unit 2100 downward through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning opening 2104. The right guide member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 that can detect magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 and are discharged downward from the game board 4 from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is circular in a front view, and a lifting mechanism that moves up and down the rotational decoration body unit 3200. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the lifting mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3200 can be moved up and down by an elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is configured such that a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and the rotation radius of the rotating decorative body is increased by the centrifugal force by rotating. It is like that.

  In addition, the rotating ornament body unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the rotation radius of the entire rotating ornament body expands and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to make it possible to give a strong impact on the player, to delight the player and to suppress the interest in the game, and to attract the player's interest strongly Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  The swing ornament body unit 3300 includes swing ornament bodies disposed on the left and right sides of the swing ornament body unit 3200 adjacent to the rotational ornament body unit 3200 located at the ascending position. The body can be swung to the left and right at the same time.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 includes plate-like ceiling decoration bodies that extend in the horizontal direction at the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling decoration body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration body is lowered in a descending direction according to the gaming state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 includes a character body that is shaped like a ninja and is three-dimensionally shaped, and the character body moves in the left-right direction from the right end position toward the center side according to the gaming state. Can be done. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body 3400 is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis in which the head extends in the left-right direction, and can reciprocate around the axis in which the right arm extends in the up-down direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is scolding. Further, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an action as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration body unit]
Next, the gear decoration body unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration body unit 3500 includes a gear-shaped gear decoration body that can be rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction and is arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This function display unit 1180 is mounted and disposed at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 is a gaming state indicator composed of LEDs for displaying a gaming state changed by a game ball driven into the gaming area 1100 at the left end when viewed from the front. 1183, an upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of the game ball to the upper start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status indicator 1183, and the upper special Upper special symbol display comprising 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result arranged as the first special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the symbol memory indicator 1184 and drawn by receiving the game ball to the upper start port 2101 1185 and the second special lottery placed on the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and drawn by accepting a game ball to the lower starting port 2102 The lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of 7-segment LEDs for displaying the fruit as the second special symbol, and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186 to the lower start port 2102 And a lower special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of game balls.

  The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls that are arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. The normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of the four LEDs and the normal lottery result which is placed under the normal symbol memory display and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 is displayed as a normal symbol. Opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”, which is arranged side by side to the upper right side of the normal symbol display 1189 and the normal symbol storage indicator 1188. And a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds).

  The gaming status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming statuses (in combination with lighting / flashing) For example, a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  When the upper special symbol display 1184 cannot display the first special symbol in the upper special symbol display 1185 in a variable manner, when the game ball is received in the upper start port 2101, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored first special symbols (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs. The upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on and blinked. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off when the number of holdings is 2, and the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both turned on when the number of holdings is two. The upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is 3, and both the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b blink when the number of held is four. . In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 variably, if the game ball is received at the lower start port 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of stored second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on and blinking. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off when the number of holdings is two, and the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned on when the number of holdings is two. The lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks when the number of holds is 3, and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights. When the number of held is 4, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b blink together. . In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game balls to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after it fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. Can be recognized by the user (variable display game).

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 can be played by a combination of the emission color and lighting / flashing. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  The normal symbol memory display 1188 is a normal symbol whose start of variable display is suspended (stored) when a game ball passes through the gate part 2350 when the normal symbol display 1189 cannot display the normal symbol in a variable manner. The number of hold (number of storage) is displayed. The normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a made of predetermined LEDs and a 15-round display lamp 1190b, and can display the number of rounds in a “hit” game by lighting each lamp. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, normal symbol indicator 1189, and The round indicator 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. Note that a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table The position of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. Let the hall clerk recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without confusion. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. 14 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, and performs the game operation. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor, and detection signals from various detection switches. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, power failure or instantaneous And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring signs of a stop.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a non-volatile storage means built therein. The nonvolatile storage means stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying the individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile storage means.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102, and the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Yes. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, the general winning port switch 3020 that detects the gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and the big winning port 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The signal is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the upper special symbol display from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191 1185, Drive signals to the special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, and the round display 1190 Or output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used for the prize opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used as the upper start port 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103 are opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is a main control various serial I / O port, and the like are connected via a bus 4100ah. It is connected. The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to a method of transmitting as serial data, and a method of communicating as parallel data may be used. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process and executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the command is stored in the ring buffer or on the condition that it is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Sound that adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 with a built-in sound source VDP 4160a described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Loses its contents because it can no longer hold.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, frame The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I's centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sound volume flows from the mute to the maximum volume by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b includes a brightness correction for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. And instructing the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” will be described later. As described above, each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. (Effect information (1 ms) and later-described effect backup information (1 ms) are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca. Includes various information (for example, in the operation unit 400) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like created based on detection signals from the various detection switches provided.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match, Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). Instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, the music flowing from the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, sound effects, etc. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”). A sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed; It includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggested display object image data used for displaying the suggested display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame as viewed from the player. 3 is the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main body frame rear image, the service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen. The screen image data and the during-rest screen image data used for displaying the during-rest screen are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control The schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

[7-2-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is transferred from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, as shown in FIG. 14, stores music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually applied to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the notification sound incorporated in the track used. Is combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound in order to notify the store clerk etc. of fraudulent behavior, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The track sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the produced effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set to the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  In other words, the sound that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is only the notification sound of the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the sound generation described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period of time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as the volume value (at this time, when the adjustment is made by moving to the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the adjusted effect sound is sub- Set to the volume value), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  Thus, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 When a notification sound flows in order to notify a store clerk or the like of a fraudulent act to the hall, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the silenced effect sound flows from the speaker 130 and proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the speaker is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time. When the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data on the left and right sides, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, the left audio data obtained by synthesizing the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are mutually connected. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as a center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, if it is December 25, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or if it is New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to control whether the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a cold cathode tube type or only ON / OFF of the backlight. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the year when the input date information is entered on the production line as the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set to the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode, and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be set to a desired value. It can be adjusted to brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-2-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob portion to adjust the volume of music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects flow from the speaker 130.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful, or that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) The notification sound for the flow of sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is also operated. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the sound volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4 with built-in sound source) So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. In the embodiment, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 and the press of the operation unit 400 are adjusted. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing a setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the sound volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, or sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game. When the player who has played the game feels loud and adjusts the volume, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time It is possible to reduce the sound volume to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling the effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general diagram synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[8-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the upper start-up switch 3022 shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 variation pattern, special figure 1 symbol type, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG.

  The special figure 1 variation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is for specifying the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 synchronous effect, and the change state designation command is the gaming state (high probability state, short time at the start of change of the special figure 1 or special figure 2). This is a command indicating a gaming state or the like. The change state designation command has a value corresponding to the gaming state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of change or when the gaming state is switched. Other special figure 1 synchronized production related commands include a special figure 1 variation type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special figure 1 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special diagram 1 variation pattern command. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). In addition, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. 15, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 includes a special symbol 2 variation pattern, a special symbol 2 symbol type, a command with the name special symbol 2 synchronization effect end, and the like. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG.

  The special figure 2 variation pattern command is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is for specifying off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the special figure 2 synchronization effect end. Similarly to the special figure 1, a special figure 2 variation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern is included.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 variation, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 2 variation pattern. The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). In addition, as described above, in the same way as in the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 2 as well, the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 fluctuation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attack unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2103 is being opened or the opening is started, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2100) 2103 during the closing of the round or the start of closing), the winning prize 1 count display command has been detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103), and the jackpot ending command is the jackpot ending Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  In the jackpot ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the jackpot. For example, if the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability non-temporary gaming state, the mode value is set to “01H”, and if the gaming state after the big hit is a high probability short time gaming state, the mode value is set to “04H”. The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Also, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the gaming state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-short-time gaming state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery. Therefore, whether the main control board 4100 side has a high probability or a low ending May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the jackpot ending command.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or releasing the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. is there).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on process described later is executed, and the vicinity of step S92 in the main control side timer interruption process A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and, as shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general graphic synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for specifying the disengagement, short opening per opening, long opening per, The general-purpose synchronized effect end command is for instructing the end of the general-purpose synchronized effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is started during normal power release. The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display category is composed of commands named “abnormal prize display”, “connection abnormality display”, “disconnection / short circuit abnormality display”, “magnetic detection switch abnormality display”, “door open”, and “door close”. ing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown, for example, in FIGS.

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (while the condition device is operating) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit) (When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, Instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection occurs. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door opening command is generated when the door frame 5 opens with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The door frame closing command indicates that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in a state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening command is instructed to notify the main body frame opening, and the main body frame closing command closes the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. In this state, the main body frame release notification end is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command. , Which is transmitted when a break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch). The close command is transmitted when the main body frame is detected to be closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is, for example, shown in FIG.

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 16, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related category includes various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 12). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[8-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 16, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These commands are assigned “9 * H” “5 * H” as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific number). And is predetermined by the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG.

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening Based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102, the winning instruction to the start port is instructed. The change shortening operation end designation command is used to instruct a state transition from the change shortening operation state to the change shortening non-operation state. The high probability end designation command is an instruction for state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. Special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (game balls enter the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. Tells the number of balls that have not been used yet. The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0-4 pieces (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. Tells the number of balls that have not been used yet. The normal symbol storage command is used for normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (the number of holds).

  The special symbol 1 holding number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 actuated balls is increased (when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of held balls increases). The special symbol 2 holding number designation command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the holding number increases). The special symbol 1 hold number designation command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1” and prefetched when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. It represents none. When the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is pre-read, the special symbol 1 reservation is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variation display on the function display board 1191. Instructs the start of a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on 1 hold. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is prefetched, the special symbol 2 reservation is prefetched before it is used for the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. An instruction is given to start a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold. The symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command are transmitted when a special symbol reservation number designation command is transmitted. Note that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol reservation number designation command is prefetched.

  The symbol type prefetch command is used for designating a miss, a specific big hit, and a non-specific big hit at the time of prefetching. The variation pattern prefetch command is used to specify an effect pattern (variation pattern) in a mode at the time of prefetching. The variation type prefetch command is for designating the variation type in the mode at the time of prefetching.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is obtained by using the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol hold and pre-reading before the normal symbol hold is used in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 for the normal symbol change display. This command is for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect informing a notice of the display result. For the normal symbols, a normal symbol storage command, a normal symbol type prefetch command, and a normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command corresponding to prefetching may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, “prefetching” simply refers to prefetching of special symbols.

  In addition, when performing the prefetch determination, as described later, the same processing as that at the start of variation is executed to generate a command including an effect pattern and a pattern. Since it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the peripheral control board 4140 that received the command is at the time of start of fluctuation or at the time of starting port winning, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening switch 2109 (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in order to notify the fact by voice, and the change shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the end of the change after confirming the change of the specified number of changes (the elapse of the stoppage period) Later). The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the lapse of the stoppage period) after the change is confirmed after digesting the high-probability count in the case of “high probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is still used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of retained increases, it is used from the retained number to display the variation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 Sent when the number of holds decreases). The special symbol 2 memory command is still used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 displays the special symbol fluctuation display. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the number of retained increases, it is used from the retained number by the lower special symbol display 1186 to display special symbols. Sent when the number of holds decreases). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the number of holdings that the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and is not yet used in the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 for the normal symbol change display) When there is a game ball passing through the gate part 2350 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the normal symbol display 1189 for the normal symbol change display from the number of holds. ). Similarly to the special symbol, the normal symbol hold number designation command that changes depending on the presence or absence of prefetching may be transmitted for the normal symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of prefetching is indicated by the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number increases (when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 and the holding number increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern pre-read command and the normal symbol type pre-read command may be transmitted separately as the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol type pre-read command. . In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol holding number designation command, but it is not necessary to limit to this. It may be transmitted before the symbol hold number designation command. The same applies to a case where a pre-read command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern pre-read command) and a normal symbol pattern type (normal symbol type pre-read command) is transmitted instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or from the lower start opening switch 2109. (When a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal), the speaker is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted to notify the effect, there are cases where the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start opening winning command and differs depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is the specification of using for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Some specifications do not notify by voice from 130.

  In addition to the above-described commands, for example, a gaming machine related information command for transmitting gaming machine related information including model information of gaming machines may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined opportunity. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can perform effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, the main control board is configured to always send a normal symbol type prefetch effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a model that executes a pre-reading effect based on normal symbol hold and a model that does not. Then, if it is determined that the peripheral control board 4140 is a model that can execute the prefetching effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the gaming machine related information command, the normal symbol type prefetching effect transmitted from the main control board 4100 While the command is processed as a valid command to enable execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, if it is determined that the model is not capable of executing the general-purpose prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there are a model that can execute the usual-look-ahead effect and a model that cannot be executed.

  The main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process executed only once when the power is turned on (any one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Yes, multiple times during the game (when winning the start opening, when starting the fluctuation, big hit (or hit in the normal case), when the game state changes, triggering the execution of the timer interrupt process May be transmitted. The transmission at the time of power-on is not limited to being transmitted during the power-on process as long as it is executed when triggered by the execution of the process at power-on. For example, a game machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance when the power is turned on, and stored in the command buffer while the steady processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the power-on processing is completed is executed It is also included that transmitted gaming machine related information command is transmitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, an effect that can be executed on the peripheral control board 4140 is processed as an effective command. The command is configured to be discarded as an invalid command. Therefore, even if the presentation executed depends on the model of the gaming machine, the control program for the main control board 4100 can be shared, and the control program for the main control board 4100 can be developed for each model. This eliminates the need to perform the test, shortening the development period, and shortening the test period at the testing institution.

[9. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then each process such as operation of an initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, and the like will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number Random numbers for determination initial value determination, random numbers for reach determination used for determining whether or not reach (reach off) is generated when no big hit gaming state is generated, upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special symbol The random display pattern random number to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the indicator 1186, and the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 when the big hit gaming state is generated. For the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of the jackpot symbol for the jackpot symbol used to determine the jackpot symbol to be displayed Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. Note that the big hit symbol random number described above is used for determining the small hit symbol used in the determination of the small bonus symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated. Also used as On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the pair of movable pieces 2106 and an initial value for the random number for determination per normal symbol are used. Random numbers for determining an initial value for determining normal symbols, and random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols variably displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical range (from a minimum value to a maximum value) according to a predetermined arithmetic expression ( In this embodiment, it is updated according to a certain rule so that all values appear within a value 0 as a minimum value and a value 32767 as a maximum value. As a result, it is possible to extract a random value with no bias. Further, the random number value is updated based on a 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing the 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator by the main control MPU 4100a. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the sequence of the random number sequence of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number sequences of other cycles. Thus, since the arrangement of the random number sequence generated for each period is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  The random numbers described above are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767 as the maximum value). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then proceeds from the minimum value (value 0) to the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Each time the big hit determination random number is updated for one cycle, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit determination random number is determined based on the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination, and the determined start value The update is repeated again sequentially. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the random numbers for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol determination described above are also updated by the same method as the method for updating the jackpot determination random number described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the big hit determination initial value determining value is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The start value (initial value) of the next period of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is sequentially repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. Or the checksum value obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value in the main control side power-on process (to be described later) Value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off process (power-off). In the case of clearing the area, the big hit determination random number is taken out for the main control MPU 4100a, and the ID code which is different for each main control MPU 4100a is set, and the big hit determination random number is used based on the extracted ID code. It is set as a starting value for the random number, and the jackpot determination random number is updated from this starting value. For this reason, an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, for the big hit determination random number, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. As described above, the value set in the jackpot determination random number is derived by using the ID code, and the ID code is stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. First information is stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a and the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Thus, based on the ID code, the start value of the jackpot determination random number is analyzed by taking two steps of security measures, that is, the second security measure that always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a. Is preventing. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the jackpot determination random number may be set by extracting the hardware random number described above. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, even if it is the same game board, it is possible to set a different start value for the big hit determination random number every time, and the security can be further strengthened.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which the ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as the initial value of the jackpot determination random number. For example, an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains and disassembles the game board 4 by some method. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number coincides with the jackpot determination value, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in other game boards, that is, other pachinko gaming machines. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game winning ball is entered at the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at each predetermined interval, the big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
In the initial value update type counter, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a extracts the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile storage means, and based on the extracted ID code. The initial value deriving process for deriving always the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, a prime number. That is, in this embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from that of the big hit determination random number, the number of random number values to be the big hit can be made not to be a prime number. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384). In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is obtained by some method, and the game ball is started upward by irradiating the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 with radio waves. When a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the values in the jackpot determination value range (jackpot determination range). It can be said that there is a high probability.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing continuation of main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. Do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is inputted to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC latches the state that the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 being operated to the main control MPU 4100a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from the time of power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system for controlling drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting to boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the power is restored ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” means not only the state where the power is turned off but also the state where the power is turned on, the state where the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and the detection that a high frequency has been applied. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear and when the game information is erased, the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number described above.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) is displayed. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the error sharing navigation command for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing, based on the concept of time sharing. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error release unit) that should have been originally used to release an error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from the power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol and the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns again to step S46, and the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display. The drive signal output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). The checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interruption process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the generation of another interrupt is permitted. The clearing of the interrupt flag may be executed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. By doing so, management of interrupt processing is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to occurrence of other interrupts during timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control program enters each of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 and the large winning opening 2103. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball, a detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, and a lower detection that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 A detection signal from the start port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball to be described later From the payout control board 4110 notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the control process. Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 15 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening 2103 are shown. , A detection signal from an upper start switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 is read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not have the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. -False detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by reading twice in total, that is, twice reading compared for the third time and twice reading compared for the second time to the fourth time Therefore, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update processing. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on this input information. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 4110 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code that is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103, for example. Triggered by the fact that the detection information based on the detected signal has been written in the corresponding defined bit areas defined successively one bit at a time for the number of winning prize openings 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is generated as a prize ball instruction to pay out and is sent to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since there are two large winning openings 2103 as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From the inside, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit area” and “second bit area” in this order. For example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, the definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and prepares for the next game ball to be received.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the main control program sets the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the big prize opening 2103 to the fourth bit, the pachinko gaming machine in which only one big prize opening is provided as in this embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires information on the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program performs a mask process on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with a prize ball effective range of a special prize opening 2103 described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program, for example, as a mask process for each defined bit area in which detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written is forcibly executed. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”), and the prize ball command may not be written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program detects the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the big prize opening 2103 in the first special game state. In response to being written in the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out, and the transmission information storage area described above Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the speaker, for example, “ The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special gaming state, the main control program detects detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103 in the special winning opening 2103. If not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the game ball payout operation from being executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103 and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 to allow the game ball to be paid out. To do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of payouts that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls to the special winning opening 2103, is an excessive payout abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 16). ) In the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  In this way, since a substantially illegal game ball is not paid out, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, instead of the main control program, when it is detected that a game ball has been received at the special winning opening 2103, the main control program immediately writes an excessive winning abnormality command in the transmission information storage area to control the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The speaker may be informed.

  Thereafter, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received for the special winning opening 2103, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error canceling navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release classified into the status display of FIG. 16). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch 2110 that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103, the main control program is Then, a prize abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. Then, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the state is subsequently shifted to the probability variation state, while if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state (winning probability control). means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of the special symbol, or the lower special symbol display The output of the lighting signal is set so that 1186 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Further, when the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, the various commands classified into the jackpot relationship shown in FIG. 15 (the jackpot opening command, the jackpot opening 1 Nth display command, the jackpot 1 A closing display command, a winning prize 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command), and store them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area or open / close the opening / closing member 2107 or The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control program sets two rounds so that the two-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on when the number of times (rounds) the grand prize winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is six, the six-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. Set the lighting signal output to the 6-round display lamp and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or turn on the 12-round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the round is 12 times To set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability variation state with a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

  By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when a winning winning of a game ball is triggered, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and a big hit lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting state of a so-called probability variation lamp as a gaming state indicator is changed and the state changes to a probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the probability of the big hit lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big win is achieved. In this way, as a gaming machine that may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state is finished, the probability variation state is mainly continued until the next big hit, as if the jackpot game is looped. (Hereinafter referred to as “loop machine”), and the one that continues the probability variation state until the special symbol variation count reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter referred to as “ST (special time) machine”. ")" Exists. As described above, in the pachinko machines of different types in which the probability variation state is continued, the control of the game state indicator described above is different, and the control of the game state indicator must be designed for each model at the development stage. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is received in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case of transition from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, when the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively higher than the normal gaming state. A transition is made to the probability variation state set higher, and the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on. The main control program then sets the display state of the game state indicator 1183 to a specific interrupt cycle when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, and the probability variation state is continued. The display state of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received at the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. (Lottery means) If the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The probability is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). While the probability control state continues, the main control program keeps the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in the lighting state, while when the state shifts to a game state other than the probability change state, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 Is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in response to the transition to the probability variation state described above, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from the lighting state to the extinguishing state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (lit state continuation control means). Although the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 can be changed for a very short time as described above. It is possible to make it appear as if the display state of the game state display 1183 has not changed on the visual of the player.

  If it does in this way, it will be difficult to visually recognize that it turned off once, and it will be visually recognized as if the lighting state continues on the display mode of game state indicator 1183. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the specified number of variations of the special symbol after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation number, the program code that controls the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 between different models Can be shared. As a result, the development efficiency of different types of pachinko machines can be improved.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, When the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state is also transitioned (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific game state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation, or both games simultaneously with the above-described probability variation game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of the variable symbolic display of the special symbol during the period from a certain gaming state to the transition to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information indicating the managed gaming state. As described above, the data is transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (game state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the main control program is left with a special symbol variably displayed before the gaming state transitions to a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, the normal gaming state. Information related to the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of times information”) is included in any command that is transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern. By writing it in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (remaining fluctuation number notifying means). The main control program may include the above remaining number information in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes, is generally called after a CALL instruction included in a main routine and a program code group included in the program module is executed. Return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, since an instruction for calling back is required, at first glance, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in this embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, the next subroutine is called with another CALL instruction continuously. In addition, a return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected directly to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). Details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate passing process is performed based on the input information. In the process when passing through the gate, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  Furthermore, following the processing at the time of passing through the gate, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for judgment per normal symbol from the read gate information, and incorporates the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are in an open state, so that the game state is such that a game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102 and the game state is advantageous to the player To migrate.

  Further, the main control program determines the normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number value, and classifies the normal symbol variation display pattern shown in FIG. Are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the normal signal indicator 1189 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Further, the main control program, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program shown in FIG. Are generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol determination taken out does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. When the game is in a big hit game state, a driving signal is output to the attacking solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, or a starting opening solenoid for opening / closing the pair of movable pieces 2106 In addition to outputting drive signal to 2105, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short time medium Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means). The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Various commands categorized as commands and jackpots (for example, one winning mouth count corresponding to a big winning mouth count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, various classified as notification displays shown in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.), various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a command is used in which a command stored first for the ring buffer is output first as a command transmission buffer. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86) is executed after the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). Since the command is stored in the command transmission buffer before the pre-read related command, the special read related pre-read command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the general read related pre-read command. The

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) A frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 Then, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame release command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, and second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a main body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the dispensing control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command having the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above jackpot determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, that is, When the start prize is received (start condition is satisfied), for each start memory information (start information) that the start condition is satisfied, the counter value is taken out and used as a big hit random value. It is determined whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM matches (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (a predetermined winning condition is satisfied) The game state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and indicates a game state collectively referring to these.

  The main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the mode of jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the jackpot for each round, One of the main control built-in RAMs that is defined by an address in which the definition data (table) indicating the closing time of the big winning opening for each round and the winning ball count limit number of the game balls is offset according to the number of the big winning openings The data is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the copy. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower major prize opening (large prize opening 1) ( Step S100). When a game ball is won at the lower major prize opening (the result of step S100 is “yes”), a big winning prize winning designation command indicating that the lower major prize winning is won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the top prize winning opening (large winning prize opening 2) (step S104). When a game ball is won at the upper prize opening (the result of step S104 is “yes”), a big prize winning designation command indicating that the upper prize winning is won is set (step S106). It is detected by the count switch 2110 whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening. Further, when setting each winning designation command, it is not limited to detecting by the count switch, but each winning designation command is set when the corresponding large winning opening is opened and detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be when the game state is in accordance with S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number is a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be there.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper gate (community operation gate) (step S112). If the game ball has passed through the upper gate (the result of step S112 is “yes”), a combination operation gate passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning opening (upper start opening 2101, lower start opening 2102). First, a start port 1 identification value is set in a start port identification area indicating a start port to be determined for winning (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper start port 2101 (step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won the upper start opening 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022. Specifically, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Based on the input information.

  When the game ball wins the upper start opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a start opening winning time process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a start opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball wins at the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot determination is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a special design For example, a process for executing a pre-reading effect is executed. Details of the start opening process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the start port 2 identification value in the start port identification area (step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower start port 2102 (step S120). When a game ball wins the lower start opening 2102 (the result of step S120 is “yes”), the start opening winning time process is executed as in the case of the upper start opening 2101 (step S122). The start port 1 identification value and the start port 2 identification value are the start port winning process so that the common start port winning process can be executed for the upper start port winning and the lower start port winning. Information for identifying whether the process being executed is due to the winning process by the upper starting opening or the lower winning opening process based on each identification value, and is referred to in the start opening winning process or It is a value set in order to identify a data table to be set and an area for storing winning information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on a special symbol / electrical accessory action number that is a game progress state variable in which a type of branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game is designated (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. End the process. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, and is therefore backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation processing (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S134), special branching processing are performed. Symbol outage stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before opening the big prize opening (step S140), big winning opening release processing (step S142), processing during closing the big winning opening (step S144) ), A winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), a combination operation gate validity waiting process (step S148), or a combination operation gate validity process (step S150).

  In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), the special symbol variation in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is based on the game balls having entered the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. Processing for starting display is performed.

  In the special symbol variation processing (step S132), processing for controlling the variation display of special symbols on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, whether or not the special symbol that has started to change and has stopped is to generate a big hit game state. Judgment is made.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is stopped and a notification is made. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when the big hit game state is generated, the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is stopped and the fact is notified. Do.

  In the interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S140), a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the opened state.

  In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the open / close member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is finished, a process for notifying that is performed.

  In the combination action gate valid waiting process (step S148) or the combination action gate validation process (step S150), the upper gate (community action gate) is validated or the passage of a game ball in the upper gate is detected. .

[9-6. Processing at start-up winning a prize]
Next, the start opening winning time process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start opening winning process in the present embodiment. The start opening winning time process is executed in the processes of steps S116 (upper start opening 2101) and S122 (lower start opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  In the start opening winning process, the start opening winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created upon receipt of a game ball in the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102. At this time, the starting opening prize command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  First, the main control program sets start opening prize command creation data for creating a start opening prize command as command data (step S200), and executes command buffer setting processing (step S202). As a result, a start opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The start opening prize command of this embodiment is common regardless of the start winning opening.

  Further, the main control program sets a control data table at the time of winning the start opening corresponding to the start opening based on the starting opening 1 identification value or the start opening 2 identification value selected before the start opening winning time process starts. (Step S204). The start opening prize control data table stores data necessary for processing executed at the start winning prize. Hereinafter, the start opening winning control data table will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a start opening winning control data table in the present embodiment. The start opening winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 that is set when winning the upper starting opening 2101 and a starting opening winning control data table 2 that is set when winning the lower starting opening 2102. . Each table defines a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, a special symbol actuated reserved ball number area, a hold history special figure identification value, and a hold information storage area reference offset value, and has the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the start of the start opening winning control data table corresponding to the winning start winning opening Set the address as the control data address. As a result, since the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the start address of the set start port winning control data table, the data corresponding to the start port by the processing common to the upper start port and the lower start port Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program obtains the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the operation reserved ball number address set in the start port winning time control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reservation ball number address corresponds to the operation reservation ball number address (special symbol operation reservation ball number area) in FIG.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). When the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is “yes”), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is “no”), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, 1 is added to the special symbol total operation reservation number (the contents of the special symbol total operation reservation number area), which is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number (step S212).

  Further, the main control program specifies the storage location (special symbol holding storage area) of various random numbers such as the jackpot determination random number extracted by the start winning. Here, the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special symbol storage area (source code) related to the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102. In addition, about the line described as "special symbol 1" on the right side of each line of FIG. 23, it is a special symbol reservation storage area regarding the upper start port 2101, and about the line described as "special symbol 2" Is a special symbol reservation storage area for the lower start port 2102. In addition, in the case of “special symbol 1 variation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the reserved number. Each area stores one corresponding random value.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is added to the reserved storage area index value (offset value for referring to the reserved information storage area). ) Is added. The reserved storage area index value is “00H” if the value of the start port identification area is the start port 1 identification value, and the offset value (special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area if it is the start port 2 identification value. _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the jackpot determination random number. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by a common process even if the start port is different. In addition, it is possible to store data in different storage areas by changing the index value according to the timing of executing the common processing. For example, when jackpot determination is performed at the time of prefetch processing and when fluctuation starts, information necessary for jackpot determination can be stored in different storage areas by setting different index values.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the jackpot determination random number in the special symbol reservation storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the jackpot determination random number area (counter value of the jackpot determination random number) is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls. In addition to the big hit determination random number, during a change such as a big hit design random number, reach determination random number, variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation type random number), special symbol random number A random number for determining a winning determination or a variation pattern is extracted at the time of starting winning a prize and stored in a corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol 1 is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is used as the head address, the big hit determination random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach determination random number is T_RIT_M1, and the variation pattern random number 1 is In T_HP1_M1, the variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP2_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the special symbol identification value for selecting the variation pattern of the symbol variation in the new reserved memory based on the special symbol total operation pending number, to the corresponding reserved identification history area (special symbol reserved identification). (Area) (step S216). In the special symbol hold identification area, a continuous area of 1 byte is allocated from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and the special symbol hold identification area 1 is set to 1 from the total number of special symbols on hold. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes the area corresponding to the new reserved storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning control data table set in step S204. The special symbol hold identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper start opening (special symbol 1) or the lower start opening (special symbol 2). By determining, it is determined whether or not it is possible to start changing the special symbol.

  Finally, the main control program executes a storage prefetch process for executing the special figure prefetch effect (step S218). The special figure pre-reading effect is an effect that implies the lottery result of the special lottery in advance before starting to display the variation of the special symbol. In the memory prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before the special symbol variation display is started, and information for determining the special symbol prefetching effect on the peripheral control board based on the obtained random number value (winning information, symbol type, variation) Pattern number etc.) is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program may include information on the stop symbol of the special symbol in the command as information suggesting the type of the big hit game, instead of the lottery result itself of the special lottery. For example, information at a stage before final determination such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group in the variation pattern, and a latent hit group or a small hit group in the symbol type may be transmitted as a prefetch command. Details of the storage prefetch processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Prefetch processing]
Next, the details of the storage prefetching process (step S218) in the start opening winning time process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch process in the present embodiment. In the storage prefetching process, a process for executing prefetching for obtaining the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. Based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory pre-reading process, a predetermined command (special symbol hold number designation command) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, so that the result can be displayed before the special symbol variation display is started. It is possible to execute a special figure prefetching effect to suggest.

  When the storage prefetch process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start winning prize control data table) (step S240). Further, a hold command without prefetch is set as a hold command (step S242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the start winning prize timing and the timing when the variation is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the start winning prize and the variation start time, and prefetching is prohibited when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different. For example, if the number of times of maintenance in the short time state (number of games) or the number of times of maintenance in the fluctuation table (number of games) is the upper limit of the number of reservations (for example, if the number of reservations is four when the number of reservations is one 4 times, if there are 2 special symbols, if the total number of the upper limit number of each hold is 8 8 times, even if there are 2 special symbols, the variable display is started with priority on one symbol In such a case, prefetching is prohibited if it is within the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processing after step S282 without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether it is the prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not it is the prefetch determination prohibition period is determined based on the advance notice determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, the advance permission determination data address table corresponding to the winning start opening (setting value of the start opening identification area) is set, and the advance permission determination data according to the special symbol, the electric accessory operation number, and the hour and middle flag To get. If the acquired notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if “01H” (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. The notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the notice permission determination data, (A) shows the notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of the notice permission determination data. The notice permission determination data address table defines a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. Further, the notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time reduction flag (JITAN_FG).

  As the basic structure of the notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is the reference source information (the lower address of the reference RAM area), and the third and fourth bytes are prefetched. This is a reference table address for prohibition period determination. Using the 2nd to 4th bytes (3 bytes) of data as a basic unit, the data of this basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, as a matter of course, the data is not limited to two times, and may be one time, or may be three or more times. By adopting such a data structure, it is possible to cope with any specification by correcting only the data value without correcting the program code.

  For example, if the special symbol / electrical accessory action number is changing special symbol (HEND), the notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and prefetching is permitted. The special symbol / electrical accessory action number is numerical data. For example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1, and otherwise, it is 0 when the special symbol is waiting for change (IDOL). If the game ball is won at the upper start port 2101 and the time is short (the time flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as the look-ahead prohibition period determination reference table, and the time flag A value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time reduction flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the prefetch determination prohibition period) that is the data in the second row of the notice permission determination data 2 is selected, and the prefetching is restricted in the determination processing in step S246. Is done. Preliminary permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a look-ahead prohibition period reference table corresponding to FIG. 2, and the selection of data is the same as the preliminary permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so detailed description is omitted. To do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in different determination tables. However, if the contents are the same, a common table may be used, or each special symbol may be used. The content may be completely different.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of the storage prefetch process in FIG. In the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the prefetch determination and executes the processing from step S282.

  On the other hand, if it is not the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the main control program stores a special symbol reservation storage area (a random number for each number of reservations) corresponding to the winning start opening and the number of reservation balls. Special symbol reserved storage buffer (special from the big hit determination random number buffer) set for the corresponding special symbol reserved storage area (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to one reserved code. This is stored in the symbol random number buffer (step S248). Then, based on the random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer, the prefetch determination and the determination at the start of the fluctuation are performed. That is, at the time of prefetching, the contents of the special symbol reservation storage area stored corresponding to the number of reservations are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information of the head area of the special symbol reservation storage area is stored in the buffer. It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as jackpot determination) can be used in common.

  The special symbol hold storage area includes, for special symbol 1 and hourly symbol 2, a jackpot determination random number storage N area, a reach determination random number storage N area, a variation pattern random number 1 storage N area, and a variation pattern random number 2 storage N area. The random number storage N area for variation type and the random number storage N area for special symbols are included (N is 1 to 4). The special symbol hold storage buffer includes a jackpot determination random number buffer, a reach determination random number buffer, a variation pattern random number 1 buffer, a variation pattern random number 2 buffer, a variation type random number buffer, and a special symbol random number buffer.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when storing the third reserved memory of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol reserved memory buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determining random number memory 3 area is set to the big hit determining random number buffer, Random number buffer 3 for special symbol 1 reach determination random number, random number buffer for reach determination, special symbol 1 random pattern 1 storage 3 area value for variation, random variable 1 buffer for variation pattern, special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is stored in the random pattern 2 buffer for the variation pattern, the random number storage 3 for the special symbol 1 variation type is stored in the random type buffer for the variation type, and the value of the special symbol 1 special symbol random storage 3 is stored in the special design random number buffer. To do.

  Then, the main control program refers to each random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer set in step S248, and executes a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery (step S250). . Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (special symbol) of the special lottery (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag and the like at the time of prefetch determination. At the start of the change, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  In addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), the special lottery prefetching buffer includes a jackpot symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variation pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variation type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), a symbol type command buffer ( TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF), and a special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

  Note that the normal lottery also includes a buffer related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery, as in the case of the special lottery. The buffers related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery include a winning flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and a normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this way, it is possible to make the processing common at the time of prefetching and at the time of start of variation, as in the case of the special lottery.

  Further, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table that holds information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined in each variation pattern. One or more variation types can be defined in one variation pattern. The variation type corresponds to, for example, the type of pseudo continuous variation when a variation pattern corresponding to pseudo continuous variation is selected. When the variation type classification value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type classification value in the variation type classification buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the values from the jackpot determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent malfunction due to the remaining value when the big hit determination is performed.

  Further, the main control program sets commands (design type prefetch command, variation pattern prefetch command and variation type prefetch command) indicating the prefetch result in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). . Further, the hold command reference value when there is a prefetch is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

  Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (start winning prize control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, a reserved ball number command is acquired based on the set reserved command reference value (step S284), and the acquired reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer ( Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data restored in the process of step S282, the address of the start opening winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (a value of the start opening identifying area) where the game ball has been won is set. As described above, since the structure of the control data table at the time of the start opening winning prize is common regardless of the value of the start opening identification area, it is possible to share the subsequent processes.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to a special symbol reserved ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, and (B) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation table. . As shown in FIG. 22, the start opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball number command address table (data set at the head address of each data table (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W)). ), The special symbol reserved ball number command address table can be referred to from the address.

  The main control program stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 corresponding to the winning start opening or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 And the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved ball number command address table based on the reserved command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data includes, for each special symbol, a pending command generation table when prefetching is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), and a pending command generation when prefetching is permitted. Table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3-byte data. The first byte data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the number of holds, the second byte data is the default value set as the command mode data, and the third byte data is the command status data value. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number designation command when the special symbol 1 reserved memory number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of holds is 3) and there is a pre-read is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created based on Specifically, the status value is “62H”, the mode value is “02H” (holding number 3-1) + “11H” (default value) = “13H”, and the special symbol holding ball number designation command is “6213H”. It becomes. Finally, the created special symbol reserved ball number designation command is set in the command buffer.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, the second byte data (the default value of the mode value) of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is “01H” when prefetching is prohibited, and prefetch permission is permitted. In this case, “11H” is set. Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command are “0” when prefetching is prohibited and “1” when prefetching is permitted even after the number of reserves is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol reserved ball number designation command can determine the presence or absence of prefetching by referring to the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 4140 waits until receiving information (command) necessary for executing the special figure prefetching effect by receiving the special symbol reserved ball number designation command and referring to the mode value. You can decide whether or not. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command is “0”, it is possible to continue the process without receiving a prefetch-related command. Note that the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the description order, for example, the lower address of the storage area that refers to the reserved number is set in the second byte, etc. What is necessary is just to set in the order decided beforehand. Furthermore, the information is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and may be set for other information that accompanies a pending number command output as long as the data structure is determined in advance.

[9-8. Special symbol jackpot determination process]
Next, the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of special symbol jackpot determination processing in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination processing determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning. This process is commonly used at the time of special lottery look-ahead and when the special symbol starts to change (when the change display is confirmed).

  The main control program first acquires a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing the special lottery is acquired from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) based on the probability variation flag (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and is set to “00H” if the probability is low and “01H” if the probability is high. The special symbol big hit determination lower limit data is set according to the probability state, the lower limit data is selected based on the probability variation flag, and the lottery probability can be made different by making the lower limit data different. It has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). When the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S304 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, the big hit determination random number is the big hit determination upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the big hit determination random number is generated is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of random numbers determined to be big hit is the range from the big hit determination lower limit to the upper limit. ing. For this reason, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the big hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined as a big hit, but a value exceeding the upper limit value is set for the big hit determination random number due to noise or the like. If it happens, there is a risk that it will be judged as a big hit. In this embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, the upper limit value is also compared.

  When the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or smaller than the big hit determination upper limit value, the main control program Winning is set (step S308). Specifically, the big hit winning is set as the flag set value, and the flag set value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the big hit flag storage area is a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of prefetch determination.

  On the other hand, when the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is “yes”), or when the big hit determination random number is larger than the big hit determination upper limit (step If the result of S306 is “yes”), the winning flag is set to “no win” (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value, the value that exceeds the upper limit value is set by setting a value that causes the big hit flag to be off like when it is determined that the value is smaller than the lower limit value. Even if it is set, it is prevented from being mistakenly determined to be a big hit. As described above, when the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol jackpot determination process is terminated.

[9-9. Special symbol determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of special symbol determination processing in the present embodiment. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol is specified based on the jackpot symbol determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning.

  The main control program first acquires a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big win (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big win (the result of step S322 is “no”), the special symbol number value is shifted to set the symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the content of the big hit flag is a big hit winning (the result of step S322 is “yes”), the main control program determines the big hit symbol number and the big hit symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number. A number is acquired (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol type number is a number corresponding to the jackpot type one to one. For example, with 16R launching probability variation big hit (01H), with 16R launching non-probability variation big hit (02H), without 16R launching probability variation big hit (without time reduction: latency probability variation, 03H), with 16R launching probability variation big hit (with time reduction: sudden accuracy) , 04H), small hit (05H), and the like. The jackpot symbol number is a value provided in plural for the symbol type number. For example, 01H to 10H for a probable big hit with 16R ball, 11H to 26H for a non-probable big hit with 16R ball, 27H to 3FH for a probable big hit without 16R ball (no short time: latent probability change), 16R 40H to 55H are provided for a promising big hit without a ball (with short time: sudden accuracy), and 56H to 5FH for a small hit. In this way, the fact that a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers are provided for the same jackpot type is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the special symbol (this special symbol). On the other hand, since there is one type of missing symbol, it is not selected from the table, but a predetermined value (missed symbol command value (0)) is set for the missing symbol number.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol type number (step S326). Finally, a special symbol number value is set based on the jackpot symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

[9-10. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment process]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process in the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. Note that this processing is executed at the start of variation as in prefetching, and refers to the same variation pattern table at the time of prefetching and at the start of variation.

  The main control program first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The fluctuation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the fluctuation information source table from the fluctuation information source address table. Fluctuation information source table is a special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 according to the gaming state, hit (win fluctuation selection information state table), out of place (outside variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), It is a data table in which table information for referring to reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variation information source table is specified based on the number of data for one block of the special symbol identification value and the special symbol-specific variation distribution information source table ( Step S344). Subsequently, the winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of pre-reading or the special symbol winning flag area at the time of starting the change (for example, 00H : Out of place, 01H: Big hit, 02H: Small hit) are acquired (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big or small hit value (step S350). When the big hit or the small win is won (the result of step S350 is “yes”), the big hit variation selection information type table is searched from the hit variation selection information state table based on the state flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched big hit variation selection information type table is saved. The big hit variation selection information type table is a big hit variation type (a variation group at a stage before the big hit variation pattern is determined. For example, a variation pattern finally determined such as SP1 reach, SP2 reach, etc. This is a table for selecting a group in which groups are grouped). Depending on whether the result of the special lottery wins the big hit or the big win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value set for the big win symbol type. Since different values are set for the hits, it is possible to select a variation pattern by common processing for the big hits and the small hits.

  Next, the main control program acquires a jackpot symbol type (a value stored in the jackpot symbol type buffer if prefetching, or a value stored in the jackpot symbol type area if variation starts) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the variation information number search process in step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table corresponding to the value of the variation special symbol identification area at the time of variation pattern selection. (Step S356). The variation pattern allocation symbol type setting data selection table is for determining a type for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the value of (hit) symbol type It is a table.

  Next, the main control program executes the fluctuation information number search process using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby changing the fluctuation information number (from the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table, the hit fluctuation pattern selection value). The type value for determining the data table is acquired (step S358). Further, the saved big hit variation selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, the variation information number that is the result of the variation information number search process is set as a selection value by the process of step S358 (step S362).

  On the other hand, the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data when the big win or the small win is not won (the result of step S350 is “no”) (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The state flag is set to numerical data corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-short time (normal game) state), 01H (high probability short time state), 02H One of the values (low probability short time state) and 03H (high probability non-short time state) is set. Thereby, it is possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the gaming state. Further, reach determination for determining whether or not to generate reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or variation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) A threshold value is acquired (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach variation selection information state table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not a reach is generated in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold acquired in the process of step S368. Reach is generated when the reach determination threshold is larger than the reach determination random number.

  When the reach is not generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets a deviation variation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Further, the deviation variation selection information holding table corresponding to the status flag is searched from the deviation variation selection information status table (step S376), and the retrieved deviation variation selection information holding table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or variation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set as the selected value (step 380).

  The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of holdings. A variation pattern table set so as to be high is selected.

  On the other hand, the main control program sets a status flag as a selection value when the reach is generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”) (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the variation time is not determined by the number of holdings, but the variation time may be changed depending on the number of holdings as in the case of the normal deviation. Specifically, even when the reach variation is the same, when the number of holdings is large, a predetermined variation time (for example, a high-speed variation time immediately after the start of variation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of suspensions is small. In this case, since the variation times are different, different variation pattern commands are set.

  When the process of step S362, step S380, or step S382 ends, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), the big hit variation selection information type table is set as the search data, and the variation that is the search result of the variation information number search processing in step S358 is selected as the selected value. A pattern type value for pattern distribution is set. If the result of the special lottery is lost and a reach occurs (step S382), the reach variation selection information status table is set as search data, and the status flag is set as the selection value. Furthermore, when the result of the special lottery is lost and no reach occurs (step S380), the deviation variation selection information holding table is set as the search data, and the number of held balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for variation pattern (step S386), and executes variation information number search processing (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the variation pattern selection data selection value from the variation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390, the fluctuation information number search process Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

  The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the variation pattern set value as a set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number for random use 2 is larger, the variation pattern setting value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number for variation pattern 2 is selected. When the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. It is repeatedly executed while changing the random number for variation pattern 2 lower limit value until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages by using two types of random numbers, that is, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (a variation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The method of lottery is not limited to the method of lottery in two steps, and a method of lottery in three or more steps may be used, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by one random number for variation pattern. Since the current random numbers for variation patterns are composed of 1 byte, the result of determination using two random numbers is the same as the result of determination using a total of 2 bytes of random numbers. When a variation pattern is selected with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type determination process]
Next, details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for variation type determination data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Subsequently, the variation pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and variation information number search processing is executed (step S404).

  In the variation type determination data table, different variation type determination data is set according to the gaming state, and variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the processing of step S400. The variation type determination data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as a set of data. Then, by executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value set in the fluctuation type determination data, and the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value. Is determined, the variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the variation pattern selection value is smaller than the variation pattern lower limit value, the variation pattern lower limit value is changed until it is determined that the variation pattern selection value is greater than the next set variation pattern lower limit value. While being executed repeatedly. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in the variation information source address table. Determined.

  Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data address table for variation type selection data (address) corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number retrieval processing in step S404 (step S406). ).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a variation type random number as a comparison value (step S408), and executes a variation information number search process (step S410). At this time, the variation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the variation type setting value is acquired by the variation information number search processing.

  The variation type selection data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type set value as a set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation type random number is compared with the variation type random number lower limit value set in the variation type selection data. Is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the variation type random number lower limit value is selected. If the value of the random number for the variation type is smaller than the lower limit value of the random number for the variation type, it is determined that the value of the random number for the variation type is greater than the next set lower limit value of the random number for the variation type. Until the variable type random number lower limit is changed.

[9-12. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric utility product control process will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not being executed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparation for starting the special symbol variation display is performed.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (the value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next time is not 0 from the value stored at the head of the special symbol hold identification area. . When the loaded value is 0, that is, when the special symbol fluctuation display is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the main control program does not start the special symbol fluctuation display. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variable display is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the special symbol variable display. Specifically, first, since the variable display when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 (special symbol 2) is executed with priority, the special symbol 2 is set as the start port identification value (step S422). ), Special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set in the variation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). When the number of reserved symbols in the special symbol 2 is 0 (the result of step S428 is “no”), the special symbol 1 is set as the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 variation setting data is used as variation setting data. Set (step S432).

  The fluctuation setting data is composed of a RAM and a data table address that are referred to in order to execute the fluctuation starting process in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destinations are different values in the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. Thereby, it is possible to execute a common variation start process between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The variation setting data of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The first byte is the lower byte of the active hold ball number address, the second and third bytes are the command creation data address for the hold ball number, the fourth and fifth bytes are the transfer source address when transferring the hold memory area, and the sixth and seventh bytes are reserved. Transfer destination address at storage area transfer, 8th and 9th bytes are reserved 4 Transfer source address at storage area transfer, 10th and 11th bytes are hold 4 Transfer destination address at transfer of storage area, 12th and 13th bytes are changing setting data Address.

  When the variation setting data is set, the main control program stores the starting port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the variation of the special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the number of the operation reservation balls corresponding to the start port identification value and the special symbol total operation reservation number stored in the special symbol total operation reservation number area (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438) and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process. Note that the command creation table (FIG. 26 (A)) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is common to the prefetching, and the same table is used at the prefetching and at the start of variation to save the program capacity. Yes.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a jackpot determination random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol hold storage area, a hold memory (start memory) including various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by the start winning is stored for the number of holds for each start opening. When the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory is started, the reserved memory where the change is started is cleared, and the remaining reserved memory is shifted. For example, when the maximum number of holds is 4, the reserved memory stored in the special symbol reserved memory 2 area is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol reserved memory 3 area and the special symbol reserved memory 4 area. The stored reserved memory is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 2 area and the special symbol reserved memory 3 area. Thereafter, the special symbol hold memory 4 area is cleared (step S448). The special symbol hold storage area shift process stores the value set in the hold storage area transfer source address set in the variable setting data in the hold storage area transfer destination address and the hold storage area transfer. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address during transfer of the hold storage area are updated to the next address, and the data stored in each hold storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the changing data setting address set in the changing setting data as the setting data address, and provides information necessary for executing the special symbol changing processing executed in the next interrupt processing. A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special symbol 2 variation pattern reference command is set. S456).

  Further, the main control program obtains the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area as lower-order command data (step S458). Further, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by acquiring the variation type category value from the variation type category area (step S460) and adding the variation type category value to the command value set in the process of step S452 or step S456. Are calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and command storage processing for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if the special symbol 2 is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. Setting is performed (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a variable state designation command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Each command generated is sent in the order in which it was generated (the order stored in the command buffer), so if you want to change the transmission order, change the command generation order (the order in which the command buffer is stored) do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the variation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol holding history corresponding to the holding storage for which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol holding history (step S478). In the present embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol holding history for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, each for four pieces) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the head holding storage is started. Then, the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variation display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol holding history stored in the second area (special symbol holding history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, it is sufficient to shift an area storing seven special symbol hold histories. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process is terminated.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol / flag setting process in the present embodiment.

  The main control program first stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for determining the big hit in the special lottery in the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol for starting the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol jackpot determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2 A special symbol jackpot determination random number stored in the jackpot determination random number storage area 1) is set. Then, the set special symbol jackpot determination random number is stored (transferred) in the jackpot determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, the special symbol reservation storage area that is the target of the start of fluctuation is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol reservation storage buffer. In addition to the special symbol jackpot determination random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) jackpot determination random number storage 1 area, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area Is stored in the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number stored in the random number 1 storage 1 area for the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) fluctuation pattern for the random number 1 buffer for fluctuation pattern The random number stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random pattern 2 buffer for the variation pattern, and the random number stored in the random number storage 1 area for the special design 1 (special design 2) is stored in the variation type random number buffer. The random number value stored in the special symbol random number storage 1 area for symbol 1 (special symbol 2) is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and the address value of the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) is set to execute the special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination process is executed at the time of prefetching (when executed in the process of step S250 of the storage prefetching process), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the big hit flag. Is set. In this way, by setting the RAM area to be referred / stored before executing the special symbol jackpot determination processing in advance and at the time of fluctuation, the “special symbol jackpot determination processing” It is possible to share with. Note that the procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process is as described in FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (special symbol) of the special lottery (step S512). The special symbol determination process is the same as the process of step S252 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process. The processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. That's right. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches the special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number set value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on a special symbol display (such as 7-segment) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as display data for the special symbol display as it is, a fixed display pattern is obtained, and there is a possibility that the player can easily identify the winning type in the form displayed on the special symbol display. For this reason, the display pattern is acquired so as not to be a constant display pattern by calculation. In addition, it is possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant, but if the type of symbol type increases, it is necessary to hold the display pattern by that amount. The storage capacity for storing is increased. Therefore, by acquiring a display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

  Finally, the main control program adds the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process to the area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (one is added to the address of the searched special symbol stop area) In the area corresponding to the address that has been set (step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process is terminated.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, a special symbol actuated reserve ball number area (special symbol 1 actuated reserve ball number area or special symbol 2 actuated reserve ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol for starting the variable display is displayed. Then, the value of the special symbol operation reservation ball number area (special symbol operation reservation ball number) is set as the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set stored value is stored in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is the same as the process of step S258 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation, similar to the special symbol jackpot determination process, and will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. That's right. When the variation pattern selection determination process ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

  Next, the main control program retrieves data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value from the special symbol variation time data (step S546). The fluctuation time value acquired at this time becomes the reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring a variation type type value (step S548). Further, the main control program determines whether or not the variation type change flag indicating that the current variation display is the target of the special pseudo continuous variation is set (step S565), and the variation type change flag is set. (If the result of step S565 is “YES”), it corresponds to the rest excluding a part of the original fluctuation type “pseudo train n (n = 2 to 4)” (until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in this example). The variation type to be changed is changed to “post special pseudo-ream n (n = 2 to 4)” (step S566), the variation type change flag is reset (step S567), and the process proceeds to step S550.

  On the other hand, if the variation type change flag is not set (the result of step S565 is “NO”), the variation types corresponding to the start memory stored next are the variation types “pseudo sequence 2” to “pseudo sequence 4”. It is determined whether or not any one of "" is to be executed (step S561).

  “Pseudo-continuation 2” is a pseudo-continuous variation in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed three times, and “pseudo-continuation 3” is a pseudo-continuous variation in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed four times. “Pseudo-ream 4” is a pseudo-continuous change in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-changed five times. The main control program executes any one of “pseudo-series 2” to “pseudo-series 4” as a variation display corresponding to the next stored start memory (result of step S561). Is "YES"), it is determined whether or not to change the variation type based on a random number (for example, a variation type random number) and a determination table (a variation type change determination table not shown) (step S562).

  When changing the variation type (the result of step S562 is “YES”), the main control program sets the variation type change flag (step S563). The variation type change flag is pseudo continuous so that when the variation type is specified as a pseudo continuous variation that causes the decorative symbol to re-variate three or more times, these are executed over a plurality of special symbol variation displays. This is a flag indicating that a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol in the variation is distributed to the variation display of another special symbol. In this example, a part of pseudo continuous fluctuation executed during one special symbol fluctuation display is distributed to at least one previous special symbol fluctuation display, and the remaining pseudo continuous fluctuation is displayed in the original fluctuation display. It can be executed during the fluctuation display determined as the fluctuation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation. In this way, a part of the pseudo continuous variation executed during one special symbol variation display is distributed to the previous special symbol variation display, and the remaining pseudo continuous variation is performed during the original variation display. Thus, it is possible to shorten the fluctuation time per one special symbol as compared with a case where pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed during one special symbol fluctuation display.

  Next, the main control program corresponds to a part of the variation type “pseudo train n (n = 2 to 4)” of the next stored start memory (in this example, until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped temporarily). The variation type is changed to “previous special pseudo-ream n (n = 2 to 4)” (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S550.

  On the other hand, when the variation type corresponding to the next stored start memory does not execute any of the variation types “pseudo sequence 2” to “pseudo sequence 4” (the result of step S561 is “NO”), step Proceed to S550.

  Through the above processing, a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation that is normally executed during one special symbol fluctuation display is distributed to the previous (one previous) special symbol fluctuation display and executed. A special pseudo continuous variation similar to the pseudo continuous variation executed during the special symbol variation display of the first time can be executed over a plurality of special symbol variation displays. Note that, not limited to the above-described example, if the special lottery result drawn when the game ball is received by the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 is not “big hit” or “small win”, after the start memory (It may be assigned to the next (one after) start memory, or may be assigned to each of a plurality of start memories including the next (one after) start memory). You may make it distribute to the change display of the special symbol performed correspondingly. Alternatively, a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation executed during one special symbol fluctuation display may be distributed to a plurality of fluctuation displays including the previous special symbol fluctuation display. In other words, the pseudo continuous fluctuation executed during the single fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to one start winning prize spans the multiple fluctuation display of the special symbol executed corresponding to the plurality of starting winning prizes. As long as the effect that is executed as pseudo continuous variation is distributed and executed in a plurality of variations of special symbols corresponding to each of the plurality of start memories, the period (special pseudo continuous variation is The number of special symbol variations to be executed (number of start memories)) and the timing (whether to allocate the previous start memory or the subsequent start memory) are not limited to those described above.

  In the above example, when the special symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation type of the next variation display is determined, and the special pseudo continuous variation is performed according to the result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this. For the memory pre-reading process of the start winning prize process executed when the game ball is received by the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 Thus, the variation type of the variation display based on the start winning may be determined, and a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to execute the special pseudo continuous variation. That is, the lottery timing for determining whether or not to execute the special pseudo continuous variation is not limited to the above-described lottery, and any lottery timing may be used as long as it can be executed at any predetermined timing.

  The main control program sets the obtained variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is the same as the process of step S262 in the storage prefetching process, and can be shared between prefetching and fluctuation as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, as described in FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times (the number of times the decorative symbol is revariable by pseudo continuous variation). Then, the main control program adds the added value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference changing time value searched in the process of step S546, and obtains the final changing time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electrical accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated. As described above, when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation type, the variation time is longer than the normal variation display by adding the added value to the reference variation time value. It should be noted that the variation time of the “back special pseudo train n”, which is a difference obtained by removing the performance corresponding to the “previous special pseudo train n” from the “pseudo train n”, is shorter than the “pseudo train n”. That is, the variation time of the “rear special pseudo train n” is obtained by excluding the production time of the production corresponding to the “previous special pseudo train n” from the variation time of the “pseudo sequence n”. By changing to “special quasi-ream n”, the variation time is equal to the production time (for example 10 seconds) of the production corresponding to “previous special quasi-ream n” with respect to the variation time (for example 40 seconds) of “pseudo-ream n”. It is shortened (for example, shortened from 40 seconds to 30 seconds).

[9-15. Normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is started, the main control program first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion (ordinary gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Input information is written to the area. The main control program determines the passage of the game ball with reference to the written input information.

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process when passing through the gate (step S802). In the process at the time of passing through the gate, the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Details of the processing at the time of passing the gate will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game ball has not passed through the gate part 2350 (the result of step S800 is “no”), or when the process at the time of passing through the gate is completed, the main control program reads the normal symbol / normal electric accessory. A process corresponding to the normal symbol / electrical instrument action number is searched from the action call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

  In step S810, the normal symbol variation waiting process (step S812), the normal symbol variation processing (step S814), the normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), and the normal symbol are shifted based on the normal symbol / electrical accessory action number. A stop process (step S818), a normal symbol stop process (step S820), a normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), or a normal power operation end interval process (step S824) is executed.

  In the normal symbol variation waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350, processing for starting the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol changing process (step S814), processing for controlling the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol winning determination process (step S816), the normal lottery winning determination is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350.

  In the normal symbol shift stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped, and a process of notifying that is performed.

  In the normal symbol stop process (step S820), when the normal lottery is won, the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped to notify that, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessories) Processing for setting an opening / closing mode of 2106 is performed.

  In the ordinary electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the game ball can be received in the lower start port 2102. For example, processing relating to an operation to prevent the game ball from being received in the mouth 2102 is performed.

  In the normal power operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 has been completed, and when it has been completed, a process for notifying the fact is performed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process at the time of passing the gate (step S802) will be described. In the process at the time of passing through the gate, a command transmitted when the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected is set, a random number for normal lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, or a pre-reading effect is executed. For example, to execute a process or the like.

  In the process when passing through the gate, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, the value of the counter that updates the random number for determination per normal symbol is extracted, and the gate of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. Store in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (four sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It has become. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Hereinafter, the procedure of the process at the time of passing the gate will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the process at the time of passing the gate is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol actuated ball number area as the actuated ball number (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of suspended balls is 4 or more which is the upper limit value (step S832). When the number of the operation suspending balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of the operation reservation balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “no”), the main control program stores the number of operation reservation balls in the normal symbol operation reservation balls count buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the contents of the normal symbol operation reserved ball number area to update the normal symbol operation reserved ball number (step S836).

  Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the reserved number (step S838). Specifically, the normal symbol random number storage area is partitioned from the 0th partition to the third partition in a predetermined unit, and each partition is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. Each time the gate passes, the normal symbol random number storage area stores a hit determination random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is successful and a hit symbol random number for determining the normal symbol hit symbol. Since the winning determination random number and the winning design random number are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. Note that the random numbers stored for normal symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a random number for reach determination or a random number for variation patterns is provided for normal symbols as in special symbols, these are gated. It can be configured to store each time it passes.

  Finally, the main control program executes the normal symbol prefetching process based on the newly stored normal symbol hold storage (step S840). Details of the normal symbol prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal symbol look-ahead processing]
Next, the details of the normal symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the process when passing through the gate will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol prefetch process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired based on the newly stored general symbol hold memory before starting the variable symbol display, and the general symbol prefetching effect is generated on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. Information for determination (normal symbol type pre-reading effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the normal symbol type prefetch command, the peripheral control substrate 4140 determines whether or not to execute the general symbol prefetch effect, and performs processing according to the determination result.

  When the normal symbol prefetching process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the prefetch determination value to prohibit prefetching (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period is reached when the process is executed (step S852).

  Here, a period during which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period during which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading determination of the normal lottery is prohibited is determined by the operation (opened) state of the movable piece 2106 (normal electric accessory).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect. In addition, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery and a short time state corresponding to the variation time in the normal lottery, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. The probability state includes a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the winning probability of the special drawing lottery is higher than the low probability state. Further, the time-saving state includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state that is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state. In the short time state in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-short time state, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is high, and the operation time of the normal electric accessory (the game at the lower start port 2102) The time during which the ball can enter the ball is long.

  In addition to the opening mode in the short-time state, the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment includes a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower start port 2102 and the game ball sufficiently to the lower start port 2102. There are two types of operation modes of long opening that can enter the ball. Furthermore, the opening mode of the short opening and the long opening may be different in the non-short-time state and the short-time state. The short opening in the non-short-time state is an open mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the start port, but in the short-time state, it may be an open mode in which it is easy to enter the start port similarly to the long open state. Further, the long opening may be an opening mode that is different between the non-time-short state and the time-short state, and may be an open mode in which the rate of winning in the start opening is further increased in the time-short state compared to the non-time-short state. In the case of a short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim and enter the lower start port 2102, and therefore, the normal look ahead effect is executed only in the case of a long opening.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading effect may be executed even when the short is opened. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect for the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult to know whether the player is a long opening or a short opening, and the expectation by the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. In addition, by making the look-ahead effect different or only partially different between the short opening and the long opening, it becomes possible for the player to identify which opening pattern will be used, and to perform a launch operation corresponding to the opening pattern. In this way, the interest in games can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as for the pre-reading effect, a gaze effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. The gasse effect is to notify the player that although the pre-reading effect is executed, but the effect is not successful (fails) in the end, the result is that the ordinary electric accessory is not released as a result. May be. As a result, the gaze effect is discouraged for the player, but if the gaze effect is not provided, the release operation is always performed when the prefetch effect is performed. The purpose is to further amplify expectations. Further, a pre-reading effect as a definite effect may be provided so that either a short opening or a long opening is always executed as a pre-reading effect. About a definite effect, it can be made to amplify expectation with respect to a player more by setting it as the aspect different from a normal prefetching effect.

  In the short-time state, the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the player has little profit to inform the long opening, so the pre-reading effect is executed. You may make it not.

  Furthermore, when the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the execution of the general figure prefetching effect may be restricted. In this embodiment, when the special figure prefetching effect which changes the mode of a hold display is performed, it is permitted to perform the common figure prefetching effect in parallel. On the other hand, when a special figure pre-reading effect that changes the background display is being executed, if the probability state is low, execution of the general-purpose pre-reading effect is permitted, and if the probability state is high, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is performed. The regulation of execution. This is because, in the special figure prefetching effect in the high probability state, the expectation for winning the special lottery is high, and therefore the effect of the normal figure prefetching effect may be reduced. However, by executing the general-purpose prefetching effect, the player can prompt the continuation of the launch without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special-design prefetching effect is being executed. You may make it perform. Further, execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of a big hit gaming state, the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the pre-reading determination prohibition period is reached (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processes after step S868. On the other hand, if the prefetch determination prohibition period has not been reached (the result of step S852 is “no”), in order to execute the prefetch determination, the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be prefetched are used as the hit determination random number buffer. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area in any of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal symbol random number buffer. The normal symbol random number buffer is configured to correspond to the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, an area for 2 bytes of the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number is secured, and the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random buffer are configured. Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls is two will be described. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively stored in the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer. Stored. In this way, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the hit determination random number buffer, and by executing the “normal symbol hit determination process” on the random value stored in the hit determination random number buffer, It is possible to perform the determination and the hit determination at the start of fluctuation by common processing.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the “normal symbol hit judgment process”, the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holds are the hit flag buffer and the normal symbol type area buffer, respectively. Therefore, it is set / referenced to the normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the winning determination random number buffer and the winning symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

  When the main control program clears the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, it sets normal symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862) and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type prefetch command creation data. A normal symbol prefetch command (corresponding to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the prefetch determination value is reset to prefetch permission (step S866).

  The main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation reserved ball number command creation data 1 as the command data after the process of step S866 is completed or in the case of the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “yes”). (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination value is prohibited (step S870). When the prefetch determination value is not prefetch prohibition (the result of step S870 is “no”), that is, when the prefetch determination value is prefetch permission. In this case, the normal symbol actuated ball number command creation data 2 is reset as command data (step S872). As described above, different commands are generated for the normal symbol operation reserved ball number command when prefetching is permitted and when prefetching is prohibited. For example, different modes are set depending on whether prefetching is permitted or prohibited. Finally, the main control program generates a normal symbol actuated holding ball number command when prefetching is permitted or when prefetching is prohibited based on the command data set in step S868 or step S872 and sets it in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol per judgment process]
Next, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol prefetching process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol determination process, a process for determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the normal symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, the lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol per unit determination lower limit value data table based on whether or not the time-short game state is set, and the normal symbol per unit determination lower limit value data is set (step S902). Normal symbols have a high probability during time reduction, and the number of hits during time reduction is greater than the number of hits during non-time reduction, so the lower limit value is smaller in the time reduction. (The total number of hits increases). Further, the main control program provisionally sets “no normal symbol winning” as a default value in the normal symbol winning determination value (step S904).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the winning determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “yes”), since the normal drawing lottery was not won, the normal symbol winning determining value (normally temporarily set in the winning flag storage area) “No symbol win” is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of losing, “0” (no normal symbol winning) is set to the winning flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is greater than or equal to the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether or not the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S906). S908). If the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is “yes”), it is determined that there is a shift as in the case where the normal drawing lottery is not won, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area are displayed. Each of them is set to “0” which is a deviation value. As in the case of the special figure, if the hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined to be a hit, but an upper limit value is set to the hit determination random number due to noise or the like. In order to cope with a malfunction in which an excessive value is set, the upper limit value is also compared.

  When the comparison value is equal to or smaller than the upper limit for hit determination (the result of step S908 is “no”), the main control program determines that the normal symbol lottery has been won, and the normal symbol win (“ 1 ") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the winning flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the normal symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Furthermore, a random number for winning symbols is set as a comparison value (step S916), and a variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search process to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, by setting different areas in advance in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area at the time of prefetching and at the time of fluctuation, it is possible to share the processing at the time of prefetching and at the time of fluctuation. Specifically, at the start of normal symbol variation, a hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of prefetching, a hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. By configuring as described above, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, it is possible to share the processing for the normal lottery at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation.

  The main processing related to the special lottery and the normal lottery executed on the main control board 4100 has been described above. A program for executing game control in the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program in the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, a part of modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing and the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing are extracted and shown.

  In the control program in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is divided into modules for each function. A general-purpose module is commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is a special symbol and special electric accessory control process start opening prize process or the like. It is configured to be used not only for special symbol variation waiting processing but also for normal symbol pre-reading processing for normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common module, buffer, etc. when creating a command regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Further, a process (variation information number retrieval process) for retrieving data (variation information number) from a predetermined table can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the configuration of the table to be searched and specifying the search range and search parameters. By configuring the modules in common as described above, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  In addition, the command buffer setting process and the variation information number search process share a module with a relatively small number of procedures. It is standardized at the time of starting prize) and at the start of fluctuation.

  More specifically, as described above, at the time of prefetching (memory prefetching processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol variation waiting processing), special symbol jackpot determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28), A variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and a variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to the value stored at the specified address. By specifying the reference address before executing the process, it is stored in different areas at the time of prefetching and at the start of fluctuation. Processing can be executed based on the value. In addition to the value, a table reference destination may be designated. For example, if it is applied to a process of referring to a different table depending on the gaming state, it can be a common process regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for making the normal lottery hit determination is shared in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a hit flag indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is acquired from the hit flag storage area and processed, but when executed from the normal symbol prefetch determination process, refer to the hit flag buffer address. Although it is set as an address, when it is normally executed from the symbol variation waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as a reference address.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share a module with a relatively large number of processes as described above, thereby improving program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 44 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs the peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by, for example, writing “0” in the storage area of the built-in VRAM in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, effect backup information (1fr) that is the contents backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, the peripheral backup SRAM 4150d is also compared with the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to the Bank 0 (SRAM) that is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A 0 is forcibly written to make a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control unit power-on process, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in this contact sensitivity adjustment function at power-on, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 uses the initial value of a predetermined contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) as the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a in response to the start of power supply by the power supply control unit. Also referred to as “determination threshold”.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, a luminance setting process for the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board so that the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is obtained. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the game board 4 is stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process to be described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is monitored. Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a in the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display from the channels CH1 and 2 by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. The data is output to the device 1900 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Thereby, although delay of processing time can be prevented, so-called frame dropping occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later, and shown in FIG. It is a mechanism in which priority can be given to synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided on the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. Stereo playback.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interruption process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start of the starting opening prize effect, the number of ordinary symbols held (0 to 4) Normal symbol memory command for identifying the symbol, symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and each time the game ball is received in the big prize opening 2103 Or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error generation command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It is analyzed whether or not there is (command analyzing means), and the current gaming state is recognized. In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the effect control program is configured such that the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door frame open command, Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuned effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 tuned effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized in relation to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display shown in FIG. 16, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the notification are The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 is controlled in a manner different from the normal rendering aspect associated with the rendering operation. 1900 (production device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (production device), and a lamp (production device) are used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers (production devices) are used to audibly externally. Is warned (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit is updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs effect control processing (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when a demonstration screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not being executed, or when a special figure synchronization effect command is received, the progress of the special figure synchronization effect is controlled. Also, a big hit game effect is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure prefetching effect control process, the production control program performs setting at the start of execution of the special figure prefetching effect. Details of the special figure prefetch effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a general-purpose prefetch effect control process (step S1028). In the general-purpose prefetch effect control process, the effect control program controls the setting at the start of execution of the general-purpose prefetch effect and the progress control. Details of the general-purpose prefetch effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the light emission indicated by the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the data, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. The peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs on various decorative boards The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the presentation control program is arranged in time series in the peripheral control MPU 4150a as data constituting the screen generation schedule data by updating the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data and sprites from the extracted at least character data. Data is generated and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, as the game progresses, by displaying a video composed of a number of material images superimposed on the background image in each frame, an attempt is made to make it difficult for the player to run out of interest. Although it is required to perform display control so that more material images are included in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, it seems that a large number of material images are included in each frame. It seems that a big burden is imposed on the control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program is provided for each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing correspondence information in which correspondence relationships with a plurality of material images that can be represented are defined in advance, when the predetermined frame of each frame is to be displayed, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined information is referred to. At least a predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and drawing data is generated in the built-in sound source VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and excluding the other material images excluding the predetermined material image Stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM It is displayed on the crystal display device 1900 (display unit). This will be specifically described below.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of background image data (hereinafter also referred to as “specific background image data”) out of a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame, On the background image based on the specific background image data, at least a material image such as a sprite (hereinafter also referred to as “specific sprite”) is visually recognized at a position where it should be originally positioned (hereinafter referred to as “original position”). As shown in a display mode that cannot be performed (hereinafter referred to as “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence linking table (corresponding relationship information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, the correspondence between each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least the sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups). Pre-defined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (confidential release command) for canceling the visual concealment state of at least the sprite. In this correspondence linking table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and as a part of the correspondence information, the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame The value is managed.

  In this correspondence linking table, as such correspondence relationship information, for example, at least a material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, Correspondence relations with a secrecy release command for releasing the visual concealment state of at least the material image are defined in advance. In the following description, the at least material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the display control program tries to display a predetermined frame according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the correspondence relationship in the correspondence association table is controlled by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. With reference to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame is specified (material image specifying means).

  Furthermore, the production control program identifies the secrecy release command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table when the desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instructing means). The secrecy release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as “desired sprite number”) that can identify a desired sprite whose secrecy state should be released in the predetermined frame. As a result of the output of the secrecy release command, the display state flag of the name tag information is updated to the one that was off in the initial state. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a executes the drawing process.

  Here, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) as follows when trying to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has not received the concealment release command, a display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame based on the correspondence information in the correspondence relation table is kept in a concealed state. Drawing data to be generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame of the aspect which cannot see the said desired sprite on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 by control of peripheral control MPU4150a.

  On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command, it confirms that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the concealment release command is updated to ON. As a trigger, the desired sprite corresponding to the secrecy release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence linking table. Furthermore, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a generates rendering data in the frame buffer for canceling the concealed state of the specified desired sprite and setting the display mode so that the desired sprite can be visually recognized. As a result, the effect control program can cause the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  In this way, the presentation control program does not need to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene due to the presence of the correspondence linking table. On the other hand, the sound source VDP 4160a can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control compared to the conventional display control of whether or not to output the secrecy release command to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is possible to draw a frame that does not represent any sprite. Thereby, the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, because the correspondence relationship table described above employs a configuration in which the sprite group including the desired sprite is linked to the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by) to manage the correspondence relationship. In addition, the creation work of sprite data and the design work of the production control program can be completely separated independently, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and thereafter, many devices operate with the sensitivity. Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation process, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) and the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). The function of causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the effect command (effect execution command) for executing the display operation in a mode for prompting the touch on the operation surface. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). That is, the effect control program prompts the upper platen side liquid crystal display device 244 to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact type input means). A command for executing the display operation in the mode of prompting the contact of the user is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the presentation control program (the display control program by the control thereof) is touched on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen in a mode for prompting touching is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including the initial position is acquired. In addition, this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel process, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the presentation control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, separately from the above-described presentation command (production execution command), and then stored in the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored threshold value for contact determination is written into the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program, as the predetermined timing described above, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 15) ) At the end of a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), or when the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) fluctuation time has elapsed, 15), the above threshold setting command is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel 246 is touched when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the outside. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, and based on the threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the threshold value for use. Specifically, touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold setting command, acquires the capacitance based on the detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of touch panel 246. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined threshold value for contact determination is updated, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled. (Calibration) For this reason, the production control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command, so that the game always affects the touch panel 246 without affecting the game. The detection of a contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, as shown in FIG. Or, since a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the reception of the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the player has stopped the game, there is a low possibility that the player touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246. Timing can be illustrated. That is, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during a special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variation display ends. Yes.

  In addition, as a timing at which the threshold setting command should be output, a command for synchronizing effect end when the effect control program is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (see FIG. 15). It may be the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the receipt.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 that can store a large number of game balls and easily generate static electricity. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the sound designated by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even if a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a and sets the volume to a low level, the store and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speakers is reduced, the sound volume is high when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating (in this embodiment, the maximum volume The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful and advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, included in the target Bank0 (1fr) The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (in the backup first area 4150cb) Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is provided in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db by using the production information (SRAM) stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts by setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the production control program is currently executing the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009, and interrupts for 1 ms in step S1010. A timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And S1036 is performed. Finally, in step S1038, the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, and a value 0 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 can be received is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 42 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN as shown in FIG. 42 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt for the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, when the occurrence of the 1st timer interrupt for the 33rd time happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). When 1 is added to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MP4 4150a and the external control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. 13 are arranged in time series. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program determines the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. Based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. The door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is generated by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 based on drive data indicated by the pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting signals is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) Rotation (rotation direction) history information 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c performs the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this routine every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is executed, frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up Production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in 4150 cah and operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 of backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1ms). Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 starts to transmit main commands as serial data when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started. The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a mode in which the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated to generate noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. The environment is susceptible. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 13 as the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Variation pattern]
Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table for managing a special symbol synchronization effect pattern (variation pattern) executed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with a special symbol variation display (variation display game) on the main control substrate 4100. They are stored in the control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) and the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), respectively. The special figure synchronization effect includes effects such as the peripheral control board 4140 variably displaying decorative symbols or displaying characters on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the variable display game. In addition, it may include effects such as operating a movable accessory during a decorative symbol variation display, causing a light emitter such as a lamp to emit light, and outputting sound from a speaker. The effects corresponding to the variation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous variation (pseudo continuous), and the like. In addition, a variation pattern across a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

  Story reach is an effect in which a specific effect is executed one or more times according to the expectation level (possibility of being a big hit) of a running variable display game in which a decorative symbol becomes a reach mode. In the present embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the specific effect, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot is set. The specific effect may be executed before the reach occurs or may be executed only after the reach occurs. In addition, examples of the effects of specific effects include effects such as screen display (cut-in) such as the appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, audio output), operation of a movable accessory, and lamp emission. . Further, a plurality of different presentation modes corresponding to the degree of expectation may be defined for the same type of presentation.

  The quasi-continuous variation is to stop the temporary display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) during a single variation display of the special symbol, and then temporarily change the decorative symbol. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display is performed a plurality of times even though the variable display is performed only once. The variation and stop of the symbols in this embodiment are normally stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after the three decorative symbols of left, middle, and right are started. The effect of pseudo-continuous variation (hereinafter this effect may be referred to as “pseudo-continuous effect”) is “change of three decorative patterns of left, middle and right starts → stops in a non-reach manner in the order of left and right → The series of effects derived in the order of “the last symbol to be stopped is a special symbol stops” in the order of a special symbol is displayed once (until the result of one special lottery is derived). It is a production to be performed. In the present embodiment, the series of effects related to the above-described pseudo-continuous effects is performed using the time added to the variation time, and the number of times the series of effects related to the pseudo-continuous effects are performed (single variable display of a special symbol). The number of times that the three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped) is set such that the degree of expectation for jackpot increases. In addition, a pseudo-continuous effect in which a series of effects related to the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is repeated four times is a jackpot finalizing effect. Further, when executing the pseudo-continuous effect, an effect such as causing a character to appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or the effect may be executed while the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, when reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the type of reach in the final variation may be defined together.

  Note that the above-mentioned special symbol may be a symbol that has been present in the middle symbol from the normal time, or may be a symbol that does not exist in the middle symbol in the normal time but appears when a pseudo continuous variation is performed. Good.

  As described above, in this example, the same effect (special pseudo continuous variation) as the pseudo continuous variation is also performed over a plurality of special symbol variations. Specifically, the temporary design and temporary change of the decorative design are executed M (in this example, M = 3 to 5) times in pseudo continuous variation (“pseudo sequence 2 to pseudo sequence 4”). An effect similar to the effect until the stop (until the first temporary stop) is executed during the change display of the special symbol executed in response to one start prize, and then once after the start prize Among the pseudo-continuous variations in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed M times during the special symbol variation display executed in response to the start winning prize, the decorative symbol is first re-varied until the final stop ( The production similar to the production from the first re-variation to the final stop is executed.

  In addition, although not shown in FIG. 47, in the variation pattern table of this example, a special effect (the pattern 12 in this example) is executed in the same manner as the “pseudo train 2” over the variation display of the special symbol twice. “Pseudo Special Puppet 2”, which is a pseudo continuous variation that is executed until the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time, and “Pseudo Series 2” over two special symbol variations. A variation pattern of “post-special quasi-ream 2”, which is a special pseudo-continuous variation in which the same effect (pattern 12 in this example) is executed and the effect from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop is performed. And a special pseudo-continuous variation in which the same effect as the “pseudo-run 3” (pattern 13 in this example) is executed over the two special symbol variation displays until the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped temporarily. Is executed "Pre-special pseudo-ream 3 This is a special pseudo-continuous variation that executes the same effect as the “pseudo-ream 3” (pattern 13 in this example) over the variation display of two special symbols, and the decorative symbol is re-variable first. The variation pattern of the “post-special quasi-ream 3” in which the effect until the final stop is executed, and the effect similar to the “pseudo-ream 4” over the variation display of the special symbol twice (in this example, the pattern 13 ) Is a special pseudo-continuous variation that is executed until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time. “Pseudo Special Pseudo Continuous” is a special pseudo continuous variation that executes the same effect as the “pseudo ream 4” (pattern 13 in this example), and the effect from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop is executed. 4 ”variation pattern It is, is set as the expected size of the jackpot as a decorative symbol the number of times to temporarily stop increases in variable display of decorative symbols to be performed over a second time varying display of the special symbols.

  Also, the variation pattern of “special pseudo-series 2 (front special pseudo-series 2 and rear special pseudo-series 2)” is similar to the variation pattern of “pseudo-series 2”, the winning information is “lost”, and the re-lottery is “ And a variation pattern in which the winning information is “big hit” in which the winning information is “4 rounds or 16 rounds” and the re-lottery is “present”. And the post special pseudo-ream 3) ”, the same as the“ pseudo-ream 3 ”variation pattern, the winning information is“ big hit ”of“ 4 rounds or 16 rounds ”and the re-lottery is“ present ”. In addition, a variation pattern in which the winning information is “losing” and the re-lottery is “no” is included, and the variation pattern of “special pseudo-ream 4 (front special pseudo-ream 4 and rear special pseudo-ream 4)” Similar to the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo-ream 4”, the winning information is “16 rounds” In addition of the fluctuation pattern of the "big hit" was re-lottery is "Yes" a, Toraku information is re-lottery be a "big hit" of the "four rounds" are also included variation pattern of "Yes".

  As described above, in the special pseudo continuous variation of the present example, the number of times that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variation display executed during the second variation display of the special symbol is “special pseudo sequence 4 (previous special pseudo sequence 4). And the special special series 4), followed by the special special series 3 (the front special pseudo series 3 and the post special pseudo series 3), and the special special series 2 (the front special pseudo series 2 and the post special pseudo series). 2) "is the smallest. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation display executed in response to the second variation display of the special symbol, in proportion to the number of temporary stoppages of the decorative symbol, the expectation of jackpot is also “special pseudo-ream 4 (previous special pseudo-ream). 4 and rear special pseudo-series 4) ">" special pseudo-series 3 (front special pseudo-series 3 and rear special pseudo-series 3) ">" special pseudo-series 2 (front special pseudo-series 2 and rear special pseudo-series 2) " It is in order.

  In addition, special pseudo-continuous fluctuations that are executed over a plurality of special symbol fluctuation displays are originally a pseudo continuous fluctuation that is executed during one special symbol fluctuation display. Since these are executed separately, the special pseudo continuous fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation have a relationship with the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Specifically, the special pseudo-continuous variation and the pseudo-continuous variation are equivalent if the number of times that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is the same (may be made to be completely coincident or may be substantially identical, but not completely coincident). ) Is a big hit expectation. In this way, in this example, the special pseudo continuous variation is executed across multiple special symbol variation displays to notify the degree of expectation of the jackpot equivalent to the pseudo continuous variation, while the special symbol variation display is performed once. The variation time per hit can be shortened.

  In this example, the special pseudo-continuous variation has been shown to execute the same effect as the pseudo-continuous variation over the two variation displays of the special symbol. As long as the effect similar to the quasi-continuous variation is executed, the number of times of the special symbol variation display is not limited to two. In other words, the pseudo-synchronous variation in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed M (in this example, M = 3 to 5) times over the variation display of the special symbol P times (P> 1). Any device that performs a similar effect may be used.

  In this case, if the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed M (in this example, M = 3 to 5) times during the P symbol variation display of the special symbol, the special symbol variation display is synchronized (for example, special symbol). There is no need to temporarily stop and re-variate the decorative symbols by temporarily stopping the decorative symbols at the timing of finalizing and stopping the symbols, or re-changing the decorative symbols at the timing of starting the change display of special symbols) Alternatively, the decoration symbol may be temporarily stopped once in each of the P times of the variation display of the special symbol (the number of the special symbol variation display and the number of the variation variation of the decoration symbol are matched (decoration symbol) (The number of times of variable display of the number of times = number of times of display of the special symbol) (the temporary design is temporarily stopped in all of the multiple times of special symbols), Decorative design variation table The number of times of the pattern is different (the number of times the decorative symbol is displayed ≠ the number of times the special symbol is changed), and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped only once in some of the special symbols. May be temporarily stopped a plurality of times (a decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped a plurality of times in a part or all of a plurality of variable displays of a special symbol).

  Further, in this example, the special pseudo continuous variation is shown that executes the same effect (the same effect pattern) as the pseudo continuous variation. As long as it is executed over a plurality of special symbol variations in a manner that can be recognized as being the same effect as the pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous variation and a part or all of the pseudo continuous variation are included. Different effects may be executed. For example, during the first variation display of a special symbol as a special pseudo-continuous variation, a pseudo-continuous variation (“pseudo sequence 2 to 2”) in which a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable is executed M (M = 3 to 5 in this example). In the pseudo-ream 4 ”), the movable body (movable accessory) is operated (pseudo continuous variation is executed instead of the same effect as the effect until the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped for the first time (until the first temporary stop). Display (for example, “pseudo continuous 2 times”) may be performed), and the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed M times during the second variation display of the special symbol. An effect similar to the effect from the first re-variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop (from the first re-change to the final stop) may be executed, or the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 The display content of the effect to be executed is different from the pseudo continuous fluctuation. On the other hand, by setting the operation mode of the movable body (movable accessory) and the output mode of the production sound output from the speaker 130 to the same mode as the pseudo continuous variation, it is possible to produce the same effect as the pseudo continuous variation. You may make it make a player recognize. As a result, for example, special pseudo-continuous variation is executed by shortening the variation time, etc. The effect similar to pseudo continuous variation is executed within the variation time of any variation display among the multiple special symbol variation displays. Even if it is not possible, it can be recognized as pseudo continuous fluctuation by the effect executed within the shortened fluctuation time. That is, the special pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be surely executed with almost no influence of the fluctuation time.

  The fluctuation pattern is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (hereinafter, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command are combined. The value (effect pattern) set in the “special pattern variation pattern command” mode and the special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) The selection is made based on the value (result of the variable display game) set in the mode of “special symbol type command” together with the type command. Also, one variation pattern may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of fluctuation patterns may correspond. When a plurality of variation patterns correspond, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a gaming state.

  The variation pattern table includes items such as variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, number of effects inserted (number of scenarios), effect selection pattern, and re-lottery. The “variation pattern name” is a name for identifying the variation pattern. The “winning information” is a result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to a value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. Instead of “winning information”, a gaming state (for example, “normal state”, “probability changed state”, “short time state”) may be used.

  The “variation time” corresponds to the variation time (execution time of the variation display game) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the variation time may be changed according to the number of starting memories. For example, when the start memory number is large (for example, the start memory number is 3 or more), the variation time may be shortened. It is the same as the variation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180. The same applies even when the variation time is shortened.

  “Number of effect insertions” is the number of executions of a specific effect executed during variable display in story reach, or the number of times that a special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether or not the effect is executed during temporary stop) during pseudo-continuous change It is. The “production selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a specific production candidate to be executed in the story reach or selecting an production to be executed at the time of temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set in which a highly reliable specific effect is more easily selected as a highly reliable variation pattern is selected. A specific example of the “production selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  “Re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute the process of re-lottering the special symbol that has been stopped after the special symbol variation display is completed. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (the process in step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the present embodiment.

  In the received command analysis process, whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by executing the effect control program on the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a). Is determined (step S1401).

  When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, it generates a peripheral control part command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45). In this peripheral control part command reception interrupt process, the main control board 4100 Are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order received.

  When the command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the effect control program sends the command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring. Reading from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the command read out in the process of step S1402 is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that it is a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 and the variation is changed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a special symbol type command (special symbol 1 symbol type command or special symbol command). 2. It is determined whether or not the symbol type command, “winning”, “specific big hit”, “winning information command” indicating “non-specific big hit” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). If it is determined that the command is a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “Yes”), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the received command End the analysis process.

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs the special command pre-reading effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether it is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 reservation number designation command (with prefetching, FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (special symbol 2 operation reserved balls) increases. As will be described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing a special figure prefetching effect, a special figure prefetching effect execution flag indicating execution of the special figure prefetching effect is set. Therefore, the determination of “Yes” in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) holding number designation command of “pre-read”. In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of “no prefetching”, the determination is “No”. Note that, as the special figure prefetching effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command (design type prefetching, variation pattern prefetching, variation type prefetching) instructing special symbol prefetching other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command. "Yes" may be determined when a command for instructing all these special figure prefetch effects is received.

  Further, if the read effect command is a special figure prefetching effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special figure prefetching effect execution flag (step S1408), and receives command analysis processing Exit. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, whether or not the special figure prefetching effect can be executed is determined in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process. Make the necessary settings to perform the production. Note that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that when the read effect command is not the special figure prefetch effect command (the result of step S1408 is “No”), the read command is the normal symbol prefetch effect command (normal symbol type prefetch command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The general-purpose pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of normal symbol operation reservation balls increases. In addition, the general map pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the general map lottery. When the common figure prefetch effect command is received, a general figure prefetch effect execution flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type prefetch effect (normal figure prefetch effect) is set. When the general-purpose pre-reading effect execution flag is set, whether or not to execute the general-purpose pre-reading effect is determined in the general-purpose pre-reading effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process. Make the necessary settings to perform the production. Note that it may be determined on the main control board 4100 whether or not to execute the general-purpose prefetching effect. Further, in the case of a model that does not execute the usual map pre-reading effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a process such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command when the read effect command is not a normal prefetch effect command (the result of step S1409 is “No”) (step S1409). S1411), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  The command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Special figure 2 synchronized production end command) and a variable state designation command for designating a gaming state (probability variation state, short time state, normal game state) after the big hit game is finished when the result of the variable display game is a big hit included. When a special figure synchronization effect end command is received, a synchronization effect end flag is set. Further, a jackpot opening command for instructing execution of an effect at the start of a jackpot game, a jackpot ending command for instructing execution of an effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included according to the result of the variable display game.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, a start opening winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a start opening winning effect for notifying that the game ball has won at the start opening is received. The start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls changes due to the winning of a game ball to the upper start opening 2101 or the start of the special symbol variation display on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is main controlled. Receive from substrate 4100. Similarly, if the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes due to the winning of a game ball to the lower start opening 2102 or the start of the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186, a special symbol 2 storage command is issued. Receive from the control board 4100.

  Further, the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number (special symbol 2 operation holding ball number), and the game board side liquid crystal display is performed based on the processing of step S1107. It is set so as to update the display corresponding to the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number (special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number) in the device 1900.

  Further, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) is used. Execute the process.

  Further, in addition to the above-described command, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted. Note that power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 for a predetermined time even when power supply from the outside such as a pachinko island facility is stopped. Information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held, and a command such as a power interruption command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or the like. In addition, when the external power supply is resumed, a power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes processing corresponding to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is one of a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and a jackpot display process (step S1700) based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Is selectively performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the reception command analysis process. In addition, a process for starting a special figure synchronization effect including a variation display of decorative symbols is performed. For example, based on the winning information of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation display game, the contents of the presentation (decoration of the decorative design, the type of reach production, the determination of whether or not the notice effect can be executed, the notice effect mode, the presence or absence of the extension effect, etc.) are determined. Settings are made according to the determined contents of production. Further, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is executed when the special figure synchronization effect is not executed. Details of the decorative symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, a special display synchronization effect (decorative symbol variation display) has been started, Controls the special drawing synchronization effect executed synchronously. In addition, when a special figure synchronization effect end command is received, a process for ending the special figure synchronization effect and stopping it is executed. In other words, in the decorative symbol variation process, effect control is performed from the start to the end of the special symbol synchronization effect. Details of the decorative symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the effect control program ends and stops the decoration symbol based on the result of the variable display game in order to end the special symbol synchronization effect accompanied by the decorative symbol variation display. Finally, the effect control program sets a process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, the process selection flag is set to [2] when the result of the variable display game is “big hit”, and the process selection flag is set to [0] when the result of the variable display game is “out”. Set.

  In order to continue the special figure synchronization effect until the special figure synchronization effect end condition is satisfied, for example, the effect control program switches the scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or changes the character. Performing effects such as making them appear. Further, an effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time or the like is executed.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the jackpot set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, a display indicating on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big prize opening 2003 is opened, a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) ) Is performed. At the end of the processing, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decoration design variation start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1404). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the process waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) on the main control board 4100 side. . Until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control related to the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  More specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is “No”), is the presentation control program executing a demonstration presentation in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900? It is determined whether or not (step S1511). If it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ( Step S1512). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), a demonstration effect display flag for starting a demonstration effect is set in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S1513).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program once ends the decoration symbol variation start processing, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. The process waits until either condition is satisfied (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”) or a predetermined time has passed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”).

  If it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues the execution of the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special symbol design type command, an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the effect control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol variation start process is executed only once at the start of the execution of the special figure synchronization effect.

[10-9. Production setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag and parameter are set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, based on the current gaming state (for example, a variation mode, a time shortening state, a probable variation short time state, a normal gaming state, etc., which may be a production mode related to the production mode only) A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of gaming state may be provided in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a variation pattern having a different production mode may be defined for each gaming state.

  Then, the effect control program sets an effect corresponding to the variation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the identified variation pattern is story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), a story reach setting process for setting data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). If it is pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “Yes”), pseudo continuous variation setting processing for setting data necessary for execution of pseudo continuous variation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing the effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, a continuous prefetch effect setting process for executing a continuous prefetch effect that can set the content of the effect independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous prefetch effect setting process, when it is determined that the continuous prefetch effect is executed in the special figure prefetch effect control process in step S1027 of FIG. 42, the progress of the continuous prefetch effect is controlled based on the determined effect content. To do. Details of the continuous prefetch effect setting processing will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the gaming state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the gaming state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the gaming state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from the speaker, etc. are set according to the gaming state. The effect pattern includes a notice mode corresponding to the variation pattern. For example, in order to suggest the result of the variable display, a specific character appears or the background color is set to a different color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is fixedly displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process ends, information necessary for executing the special figure synchronization effect is set. Then, the ramp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data of the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, a special figure synchronization effect such as a decorative symbol variation display is started.

[10-10. Decoration pattern variation processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process in the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol variation process is executed when the decorative symbol variation start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. In the decorative symbol variation process, the special symbol synchronization effect executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on the condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (decorative symbol variation display) is started.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for ending the decorative symbol variation display, that is, the special symbol synchronization effect termination condition is satisfied (step S1601). For example, the special-synchronization effect may be terminated when the special-synchronization effect end command (symbol confirmation command) is received from the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronization effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both the reception of the special figure synchronization effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronization effect may be set as the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Even if not, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so as to forcibly end the variable display and confirm and stop the decorative symbols.

  The effect control program stops (decision stops) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command when the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”) ( Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to “0” when the result of the variable display game is “out of place”, and the process selection flag is set to “2” when the result is “big hit”. If there is “small hit”, it is set to another processing selection flag (for example, “3”).

  On the other hand, in the case where the end condition of the special drawing synchronization effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, when the variation display of the decorative symbols is continued, the production control program starts with the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type is story reach (step S1604). When the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), story reach control processing for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In this embodiment, all the scenario effects executed in the story reach are selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process), but when each scenario is selected immediately before the scenario effect is executed, the story reach control process is selected. Selected. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation status of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and control according to the operation status is executed. That's fine.

  When the variation pattern type is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the variation pattern type is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). When the type of variation pattern is pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1604 is “Yes”), pseudo continuous variation control processing for controlling the progress of pseudo continuous variation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous variation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, if the type of the variation pattern is not pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes a special-synchronized effect control process corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. Further, an effect that does not depend on the variation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed next time may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, this process is terminated.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal). ) Is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the above, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank 2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 will be described as a high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 42 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Story reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine in the present embodiment, a special symbol synchronization effect is executed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol variation display (variation display game) on the main control substrate 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, in the special figure synchronization production, the production (specific production) that suggests the expectation of the fluctuation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once (or inserted). Is done.

  Further, in the effect related to the story reach, the decorative design is in the reach form, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the reach effect or after the reach effect. In the present embodiment, a specific effect in story reach is executed after reach occurs. Hereinafter, an effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, a process related to the setting of a specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described, and other variation patterns may be selected for the setting of the special figure synchronized effect such as other reach effects. Since it is processed in the same manner as described above, the description is omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probability change state, normal state) of the variable display game and the operating state (time-short state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Furthermore, the initial value (“0”) is set to the number of selected effects indicating the number of specific effects (counter) set in this process (step S1532). Subsequently, the scenario for the specific effect is selected by the number of effect insertions (steps S1533 to S1539). In this embodiment, the specific effects that are executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effect that is executed first is selected last.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of effect insertions, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). When the number of selected effects is less than the number of effect insertions (the result of step S1533 is “No”), since there is a specific effect that has not yet been selected for the scenario, the process for selecting the scenario (steps S1534 to S1538). Execute.

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). A specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure for selecting a specific effect will be described in more detail. For the effects executed in the story reach of this embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach according to the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, a specific effect of any one of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( (Possibility) is set to be high.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 54, scenarios with high expectations are easily selected in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, scenario 5 and scenario 6 with relatively high expectations are not selected in pattern 1, and scenario 1 and scenario 2 with relatively low expectations are selected in pattern 3. It is set not to be.

  Furthermore, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 of FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selected, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random number.

  Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each gaming state. For example, in a high-probability state with a high probability that a special symbol variation display is won, a scenario with a high expectation level may be easily selected to further increase the player's expectation. Furthermore, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-described gaming state, the number of executions of variation display based on a predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of executions of SP reach), or a big prize in the big hit game It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

  A random number for selecting a specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range from “0” to “1000”). Therefore, when a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected and then a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected (decline), there is a possibility that the player may have difficulty grasping the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, in the case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern, pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is 3. At this time, it is assumed that “scenario 2” is selected as the scenario corresponding to the specific performance that is executed first, “scenario 3” is selected as the scenario that is executed next, and “scenario 1” is selected as the scenario that is executed last. In this case, the specific effect executed after the specific effect (“scenario 3”) executed for the second time becomes “scenario 1” having a relatively low expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the expectation of the running variable display game corresponds to “Scenario 1” or “Scenario 3”, and the reliability of the story reach as the notice effect is impaired. There is a risk that.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described decline is prevented by adjusting the extraction range of the random value acquired in the process of step S1613. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in the present embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects to be executed last are sequentially selected. When “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), a specific effect that is executed last (third) is first executed. At this time, in the process of step S1534, random values are extracted in the range from 0 to 1000 (specified range) (FIG. 55A). If the random value extracted at this time is “550”, referring to the effect selection pattern selection table in FIG. 54, “scenario 3” is selected. Then, the effect control program stores the identification information of the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1536). Information such as image data and audio data of the selected scenario is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value) of random numbers extracted for selecting the specific effect to be executed second (step S1538). As described above, since “scenario 3” is selected in the last specific execution, if “scenario 4” is selected in the second specific execution, a fall occurs. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the generation range of the random number value is selected so that only the “scenario 1” to “scenario 3” are selected instead of the specified range from 0 to 1000. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value “600” is an upper limit value for selecting “scenario 3”. By setting the upper limit value to “600”, “scenario 4” is not selected. In FIG. 55B, the range of solid lines (“0” to “600”) is a range from which random numbers can be extracted, and the range of broken lines (range from “600” to “1000”) is a random number extraction failure. It is possible.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random value for selecting the specific effect to be executed second, “scenario 2” is selected as the scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the production control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random number value to “200” so that “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” which does not cause a fall in the specific production executed first is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “85” is extracted as the random number value, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55C).

  In step S1538, the value of the number of selected effects is 3, and the value of the number of selected effects matches the value of the number of inserted effects. Therefore, the result of the process in step S1533 is “Yes”, and the effect control program The selection of production is finished. Finally, the changed random number range (upper limit value) is set to a specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is terminated.

  In the procedure in the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers was set at the start of change (effect control process → decorative symbol change start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process). A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, all the specific effect scenarios may be selected at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (when the execution of the specific effect is started). In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command or a prefetch effect related command transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the change until the specific effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the expectation level of the variable display game to be executed later, and the variations of the effect can be varied. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the occurrence of reach, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  Alternatively, the number of random values corresponding to the number of effect insertions may be extracted at the timing of selecting a specific effect and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when random values are extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), “550” (scenario) The specific effects may be executed in the order of 3).

  Further, a random number value lottery may be performed every time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of a specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting a specific effect scenario, the lower limit of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, an effect with a higher expectation is set to be executed as the random number value is larger. Set the lower limit again. Specifically, when scenario 2 is selected for the first time, the lower limit value is set to “100” so that no fall occurs when the next specific performance is selected, and a random value in the range of “100” to “1000” To generate. By controlling in this way, the story reach can be executed in the same manner as when a specific effect is selected at the start of variation. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special drawing synchronization effect) ends. A more specific procedure will be described in the control in pseudo continuous fluctuation described later.

  Furthermore, both the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be set when a specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to perform control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” can be selected by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”. Also, “scenario 2” can always be selected by setting the lower limit value to “101” and the upper limit value to “200”. Note that the same processing can be performed when all the specific effects are selected at the start of variation. Furthermore, an item such as setting only an upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting an upper limit value and a lower limit value may be provided in the effect selection pattern table so as to be set for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit value is not “0”, random numbers from “0” to “lower limit value−upper limit value” may be generated, and the lower limit value may be added to the extracted random number value. For example, when the lower limit value is “101” and the upper limit value is “200”, a random number from “0” to “99 (= lower limit value−upper limit value)” is generated and the lower limit value “101” is added. It is good also as the random number which extracted the result.

[11-2. Example of production]
With the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect to be executed in story reach so that no downfall occurs. Next, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed in the story reach of this embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing after a reach has occurred in the variation display of decorative symbols. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative design 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and an area 1912 is formed above the start memory display portion 1911. An area 1912 displays a dialogue corresponding to a scenario of a specific effect to be executed.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario (serif) of specific effects executed in the story reach of this embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, it shows that the expectation level of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is high. More specifically, in the scenario 1, a line indicating that the degree of expectation is low (“not good!”) Is displayed, and the lines are sequentially set so that the feeling of expectation increases. In scenario 5, a line suggesting a big hit ("Is it a hit?") Is set, and in scenario 6, a line ("big hit ~!") Is set to indicate that a big hit has been established. Note that scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit is confirmed.

  Next, the story reach screen transition will be described. 58 and 59 are diagrams illustrating an example of screen transition of the story reach according to the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. Since story reach is selected as the variation pattern, reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect in which a line (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), the scenario 3 with higher expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the random number generation range is not adjusted, the specific effect with the lower expectation than the previously performed specific effect is shown in the screen (E-1). There is a risk of being executed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since control is performed so as to prevent falling, a specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the previously executed specific effect is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenario is selected in order from the last specific effect, so when scenario 1 is selected last, scenario 1 is selected for all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous variation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol is executed at least once in the special figure synchronization effect, and selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. An effect based on the scenario is executed. As in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) suggesting the degree of expectation of the currently running variable display game is executed as the effect based on the scenario.

  The temporary stop of the decorative symbol is a state where the player recognizes that the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, but the variation is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops last is slightly moving up and down, and re-variation is started from this state.

  Regarding the temporary stop of decorative symbols, in addition to the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 4, the display of the variation of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the symbols (left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) temporarily stopped thereafter may be varied again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, even if the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped with the same decorative symbol, different results may be obtained as long as the fourth symbol is different. By configuring in this way, a part of the big hit result mode is similar to the result type of the small hit (the combination of the decorative design at the time of stopping the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol is a part of the big hit result mode) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state (such as the winning probability of the variable display game) after the winning game by executing the winning game. , Variation of production can be increased.

  In the story reach in this embodiment, all scenarios to be executed at the start of change are determined, but in the pseudo continuous change in this embodiment, scenarios are selected by lottery at the timing of executing a specific effect (scenario effect). . In addition, in the case of pseudo continuous variation, when reach occurs in the last re-variation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed even if pseudo continuous variation does not occur may be executed. Alternatively, it may be a reach effect that is executed only in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation. Further, in the quasi-continuous variation, it is not necessary to generate reach at the last variation. Hereinafter, an effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous variation setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the quasi-continuous variation, as described above, the contents of the effect are drawn out immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the change, initial settings necessary for executing the pseudo continuous change are performed. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation setting process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed in step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo continuous variation setting process shown in FIG. 60, the processing related to the setting of a specific effect executed at a predetermined timing will be described. Since it is processed in the same manner as when it is selected, description thereof is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous variation setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number (temporary stop count) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

  Further, the effect control program sets the number of effect insertions as an initial value for the number of remaining effects, which is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, in order to initialize a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a specific effect scenario, a prescribed value is set (step S1553). In the present embodiment, when the scenario effect is executed, the contents of the effect are lottery and are sequentially selected from the scenario effect that is executed first. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range for the random number for scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set in order to limit the selected scenario.

  As in the case of the story mode, all scenarios may be drawn in a pseudo continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of variation. The procedure for drawing the scenario effects is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control process]
Next, the pseudo continuous variation control process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous variation control process in the present embodiment. The quasi-continuous variation control process is executed from when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started to when it is stopped, and controls execution of temporary stop and execution of scenario effect in quasi-continuous variation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo continuous variation effect of the present embodiment, when the operation input reception period of the press operation unit (effect button) 405 is set in accordance with the timing of temporary stop, and the press operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, Scenario production is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 61, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted in order to execute the scenario effect. That is, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set, a process for executing the scenario effect is executed.

  If the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not it is the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous variation control process is terminated.

  If it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S1646 is “Yes”), it indicates that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be received (pressing operation). Settings for executing the production (requesting the operation of the unit 405) are performed (step S1647). Furthermore, a pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set (step S1648), and the pseudo continuous variation control process is terminated. Note that the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step). S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired in the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is processed when the peripheral control unit is turned on (FIG. 42). ) In the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady process in FIG.

  When the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value in the range of the set upper limit value and lower limit value (step S1633). Furthermore, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the production pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a range of random numbers is set so that a scenario with low expectation is easily selected.

  When a scenario is selected, the effect control program executes scenario execution setting processing for setting effect information related to image data, sound data, etc. necessary for executing an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. (Step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is performed after the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit steady process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  Thereafter, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of random values for selecting a scenario to be executed next so that the fall of the effect contents does not occur based on the random value acquired in the process of step S1633. Setting is performed (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, at least the same scenario is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. If the acquired random value is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to “301”, a scenario having an expected degree equal to or higher than scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Further, by setting the lower limit value to “501” instead of “301”, it can be set so that it always rises.

  On the other hand, when the press operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the effect control program indicates that the press operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has timed out. It is determined whether or not (step S1638). If the time is not up (the result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo continuous variation control process is terminated, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, if the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has expired (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processes after step S1640 are executed.

  When an operation input of the press operation unit 405 is received during the press operation unit operation receivable period, or when the operation input of the press operation unit 405 is not received during the press operation unit operation receivable period, The effect control program ends the press operation unit operation suggesting effect (step S1640). Furthermore, the pressing operation unit operation acceptance flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining number of effects is subtracted by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the effect control program determines whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), since the last specific effect has been executed, the upper limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645), and pseudo continuous variation control is performed. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the remaining number of effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the time required to accept the operation of the press operation unit in order to set the operation input timing for the next press operation unit. A timer is set (step S1644).

  As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated in a state where the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer is not up and the pressing operation unit operation receivable flag is set, the specific effect is obtained. Controlled to be executed. The execution timing of the effect based on the scenario (specific effect) may be after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or may be immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer expires, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The part operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Next, an example of pseudo continuous variation will be described. In the quasi-continuous variation of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed in accordance with the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol before reach occurs in the decorative symbol variation display. Specifically, the pressing operation part suggestion effect is started from a predetermined time before the decorative design temporarily stops (the operation accepting operation for the pressing operation unit 405 is enabled), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is generated at the timing of the temporary stop. The process ends (operation reception for the pressing operation unit 405 becomes impossible). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where an operation can be received with respect to the pressing operation unit 405 (a period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be received), after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, until the re-variation of the identification symbol is started. A specific effect is executed during the period.

  The specific effect is the same as the story reach. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative design 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right part, and an area 1912 is formed above the start-up storage display unit 1911. An area 1912 displays a dialogue corresponding to a scenario of a specific effect to be executed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects in pseudo continuous variation according to the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special figure synchronization effect accompanied by a decorative symbol variation display is started, and as shown in FIG. The decorative design stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a pressing operation unit operation receivable period is reached, and a pressing operation unit suggestion effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the continuation symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is executed stops as the middle symbol, and thereafter As shown in 63 (D), the specific effect is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the decorative symbol re-variation is started, and the pressing operation portion suggestion effect is started as in FIG. 63 (B) (FIG. 63 (F)). At this time, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 63 (G)), re-variation is started without executing the specific effect (FIG. 63 (H)). Thereafter, when a temporary stop of the last decorative design is performed (FIG. 63 (I)), a reach effect is executed (FIG. 63 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 63 (J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed even when the pseudo continuous variation is not executed is executed, but the reach that is executed at this time may be an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous variation. Good. Further, the pressing operation part suggesting effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, re-variation is started without executing the specific effect. You may make it perform.

[12-4-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation timing chart]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous variation will be described. FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are diagrams for explaining the control timing of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 64 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 64A shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  First, at time t10, a game ball wins at the start ports 2101 and 2102 and a special symbol variation display on the main control board 4100 (a special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186). (Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command and a special symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command and selects a fluctuation pattern for executing pseudo continuous fluctuation.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation start (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input reception period (press operation unit operation reception) at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Possible period) is started, and the pressing operation section suggesting effect is started (time t11). The period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is selected (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

  When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (timing at which the decorative symbol re-variation starts, time t14). A specific effect based on the scenario is executed.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and scenario 4 at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is finished, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the reach effect is finished, the decoration symbol change ends in synchronization with the end of the special symbol change display on the main control board 4100, and the confirmed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Next, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period will be described. FIG. 64B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 in the first pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 64B, since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect based on scenario 1 is not executed. In addition, since the lower limit of the random number is not reset for the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, all candidate scenarios can be selected.

  Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a timing chart of a modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. FIG. 65C shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is executed at the start of re-variation of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect is executed before the most variation starts. By being configured in this way, it is possible to execute a specific effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect is skipped without being executed, and the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the subsequent pressing operation unit operation receivable period. The specific effect for the skipped portion is executed.

  Referring to FIG. 65D, the case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation reception period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation reception period. Show. In this case, the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped, but the skipped specific effect is also executed at the third temporary stop.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65D, the specific effect based on scenario 1 is executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect executed at the second temporary stop is skipped. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect is selected including the skipped portion. After the temporary stop of the decorative design, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) are sequentially executed.

  As described above, the pseudo continuous variation according to the present embodiment is executed in advance by setting a range (lower limit value) of random numbers for lottery of the subsequent specific effects based on the random numbers of the preceding specific effects. It is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect with an expected level lower than the expected level of a specific effect is executed.

  Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the player's intention.

[12-4-2. Special pseudo continuous variation timing chart]
Next, the execution timing of the effect in the special pseudo continuous variation will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timing of control of special pseudo-continuous variation in the present embodiment.

  The timing chart of FIG. 66 corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 66 shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, as in FIG. Although the timing chart of the special pseudo continuous variation corresponding to FIGS. 64 (B) to 65 (D) is not shown, the same processing may be executed in the special pseudo continuous variation.

  First, at time t10, when special symbol variation display on main control board 4100 (special symbol (identification symbol variation display, variation display game on upper special symbol display 1185 or lower special symbol display 1186) is started). When the variation type is changed by executing the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) (the result of step S562 is “YES”), the special symbol variation pattern command and the special symbol type command corresponding to the changed variation type, etc. Is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command, and selects a variation pattern (previous special pseudo sequence n (n = 2 to 4)) for executing pseudo continuous variation.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decorative symbol variation start (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input reception period (press operation unit operation reception) at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Possible period) is started, and the pressing operation section suggesting effect is started (time t11). The period during which the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is selected (step S1634 in FIG. 61).

  Then, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in synchronization with the timing of ending the first special symbol variation display of the two special symbol variation displays for which the special pseudo continuous variation is executed. In addition, when starting the second special symbol variation display among the two special symbol variation displays for which the special pseudo continuous variation is executed, the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) is executed to select the variation type. The pseudo control n (n = 2 to 4) is changed to the post special pseudo sequence n (n = 2 to 4), and a special figure variation pattern command and a special symbol design type command corresponding to the changed variation type are used as the main control board. 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period set during the first special symbol variation display (time t12), the main control board 4100 displays a special drawing on the peripheral control board 4140. The timing when the variation pattern command and special symbol type command etc. are received and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, in other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed (no fixed stop) and the re-variation is started. At (time t14), a specific effect based on the lottery scenario is executed.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and scenario 4 at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is finished, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the reach effect is finished, the decoration symbol change ends in synchronization with the end of the special symbol change display on the main control board 4100, and the confirmed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  In this way, even in the special pseudo continuous variation executed over the special symbol variation display twice, the same effect as the pseudo continuous variation executed during one special symbol variation is executed, and apparently It is difficult to determine whether a pseudo continuous variation or a special pseudo continuous variation is being performed. When the special pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, the hold display is changed when the first special symbol fluctuation display is stopped and the second special symbol fluctuation display is started. The start memory number may be subtracted from the hold display indicating “1” to change to the hold display indicating “0”, or the hold display is not changed during the special pseudo continuous variation. The hold display may be changed when the special pseudo-continuous variation is finished (in this example, when the second special symbol variation display is terminated) (in the example of FIG. 66, the second special symbol variation is performed). When the display starts, the hold display indicating the start memory number “1” is maintained to indicate “1” without being updated to the hold display indicating “0”, and the second special symbol variation display is performed. Change to hold display indicating "0" when exiting .

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Variation example of scenario selection timing]
In the example of pseudo continuous variation described above, the pressing operation unit operable period is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and the scenario for executing the specific effect at the timing when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is selected. Was. On the other hand, a case will be described in which all scenarios for executing a specific effect are selected at the start of variation as in the above-described story reach.

  When all scenarios are selected at the start of fluctuation, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process (step S1550, FIG. 60) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), steps S1533 to S1533 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) are performed. Processing similar to S1538 is executed. With this configuration, the decorative symbol variation display is started in a state in which all scenarios corresponding to the specific effects are set.

  As described above, when all scenarios are determined at the start of fluctuation, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operable period, the execution of the specific effect that has not been performed is restricted (skip). May be. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in the subsequent pressing operation unit operable period, the re-lottery may be executed to select the scenario again. In addition, it is possible to skip a specific production that has been restricted without executing a re-lottery, and to execute a specific production that has been set in advance, or to specify a scenario based on a scenario that has been skipped by releasing the restriction. An effect may be executed.

  When the last specific effect is executed, even if the specific effect that should be executed in the middle is restricted, in order to notify the player of the final expectation, A specific effect based on the determined scenario may be executed.

  Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period.

[12-5-2. Modification of specific performance execution conditions]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405. However, the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions are, for example, symbols that are confirmed and stopped, and a combination of symbols that does not appear at the time of losing, when stopping at a so-called chance, a specific effect is executed without operating the pressing operation unit 405. (At this time, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 may not be requested). In addition, the specific effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped by a combination including the symbol only for the pseudo-continuous that appears only when the pseudo-continuous is temporarily stopped instead of the chance. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be a pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol, but any symbol in the symbol sequence to be displayed may stop at the pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol. In addition, the specific effect may be executed when stopping at a normal loss pattern (so-called loss eye).

  Further, the timing of executing the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable accessory) operates, a predetermined light emitter (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Also good.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable to the left and right. For example, when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing, a specific effect may be executed. Moreover, you may make it change the aspect of production according to the rotation direction of a dial.

  As other operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick may be arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect may be executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing.

  Further, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, allowing a player to input an operation from the touch panel, and a specific effect is executed by operating the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Good. Moreover, in order to enable various inputs on the touch panel, not only the selection of a specific effect but also the effect mode of the specific effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

  Not only the contact type operation means as described above, but also non-contact type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the player may perform a specific effect by performing an operation such as holding a hand in front of the game board.

[12-6. Second modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Below, the 2nd modification of quasi-continuous fluctuation | variation is demonstrated. This second modification is a control in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on a game ball entering the upper start port 2101. However, it is not excluded that the pseudo continuous variation according to the second modification is executed based on the game ball entering the lower start port 2102.

  As described above, the pseudo continuous variation can be achieved by temporarily stopping (temporarily stopping) the variation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) during the one-time variation display of the special symbol, and then changing the decorative symbol again. This is an effect that makes it appear as if the variable display was performed a plurality of times even though the special symbol was displayed only once. In the present embodiment, the change and stop of the symbols are normally performed in the order of left, right, and middle after the start of change of the three decorative symbols of left, middle, and right. The quasi-continuous variation is derived in the order of “the variation of the three decorative symbols on the left, middle and right starts → stops in a non-reach manner in the order of left and right → the middle symbol that stops last stops in a special design”. A series of effects are repeated N times during one special lottery (more specifically, within the time of the added value determined in the variation type determination process described later). Then, after that, a decorative symbol variation effect is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern setting process performed using FIG. 67 described later, and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In the present embodiment, the number of pseudo-continuations performed using the time added to the variation time (the number of times a series of effects related to pseudo-continuous variation is performed (three decorative symbols are temporarily displayed during one variation display of a special symbol). The expectation of jackpot is set to be higher as the number of stops)) increases, and the pseudo continuous variation in which the series of effects related to the pseudo continuous variation is repeated four times is a jackpot finalizing effect. Further, when executing the pseudo continuous variation, an effect such as causing a character to appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be performed, or an effect may be performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Note that “design stop” means a stop in a state where the result of the special lottery is confirmed and displayed, and “temporary stop of the symbol” means that the result of the special lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed. Means an aspect that appears to be stopped.

  In the second variation of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 47, the effect setting process of FIG. 51, the decorative symbol change process of FIG. 52, the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the effect selection pattern table of FIG. The pseudo continuous variation setting process of FIG. 60, the pseudo continuous variation control process of FIG. 61, the effect pattern table of FIG. 62, the example of the effect of the pseudo continuous variation of FIG. 63, the timing chart of FIG. The diagram for explaining the control timing of FIG. 66 and the diagram for explaining the control timing of the special pseudo-continuous fluctuation in FIG. 66 are not used, but other processes are the same as those described above.

  A process unique to the second modification of the pseudo continuous variation will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is an example of a lottery table used for the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) and the variation type determination process performed on the main control MPU 4100a side. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect setting process. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a false pseudo-continuous effect lottery. FIG. 70 is a table used for the 贋 pseudo-continuous effect lottery, where (a) a table for the fluctuation type 10H, (b) a table for the fluctuation type 11H, (c) a table for the fluctuation type 12H, (d). It is a table for fluctuation corresponding 13H. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation process. FIG. 72 is a time chart for explaining the step-up effect, in which (a) a time chart for explaining the degree of expectation for the step-up effect, (b) pseudo continuous variation, 贋 pseudo continuous variation, and pseudo- 。 It is a time chart for explaining the relationship between each variation of pseudo continuous variation and the step-up effect. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode when pseudo continuous variation is performed. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect form when the pseudo continuous variation is performed. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode when pseudo / simultaneous pseudo continuous variation is performed.

  In this example, twelve patterns PT1 to PT12 are prepared as examples of the variation pattern, as can be understood from FIG. The variation pattern is determined based on the result of the special lottery. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery determined using the jackpot determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start is lost, the number of holds at the time of starting winning and the result of the reach determination performed using the random number for reach determination Is determined to be any one of PT1 to PT4, PT6, PT8, and PT10. When the result of the special lottery is lost, for example, when it is determined that the number of holds at the time of starting winning is 0 or 1, and it is determined not to reach, it is determined to be PT3 (loss variation), and the number of holding at the time of starting winning is determined Is 2 and it is determined not to reach, it is determined to be PT2 (displacement fluctuation), and when it is determined that the number of holds at the start winning prize is 3 and not reach, PT1 (displacement fluctuation) To be determined. In addition, when it is determined that a special lottery result will be lost (ie, when it is a lost reach), PT4 (normal reach) with a probability of 50/100 regardless of the number of holds at the time of start winning. P6 (SP Reach 1 Loss) with a probability of 25/100 P, PT8 (SP Reach 2 Loss) with a probability of 20/100, and PT10 with a probability of 5/100 (SP Reach 3 Loss) On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a win, PT5 (per normal reach) is determined with a probability of 1/100 regardless of the number of holds at the time of starting winning, and PT7 (SP reach 1 with a probability of 18/100 P). The probability is determined to be PT9 (per SP reach 2) with a probability of 30/100, PT11 (per SP reach 3) with a probability of 50/100, and PT12 with a probability of 1/100. To be determined.

  It should be noted that the level of expectation (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “expectation”) on which the result of the special lottery is winning is normal reach <SP reach 1 <SP reach 2 <SP reach 3. Normal reach, SP reach 1, SP reach 2, and SP reach 3 can all be determined in both cases where the result of the special lottery is a win or a case of lost, whereas in the case of 4 consecutive full rotations The variation pattern is a variation pattern that can be assigned only when the result of the special lottery is a win.

  Next, when the variation pattern is determined, a variation type determination process using a variation type random number is performed based on the determined variation pattern, and the status value (10H to 13H) is determined. This variation type determination process is a process performed on the main control MPU 4100a side, and is performed with reference to FIG. Then, based on the result of the variation type determination process, an addition value to be added to the variation time value of the special symbol and the number of pseudo-continuations N are determined. That is, when the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is determined based on the determined variation pattern, as shown in FIG. Then, based on the result of the variation type determination process, an addition value to be added to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern and the quasi-continuous number N are determined.

  The added value corresponds to the quasi-continuous number N, and 12 s is added for each quasi-continuous number. Therefore, the added value is 24 s if the number of pseudo-continuous times is 2, and is 36 s if the number of pseudo-continuous times is 3. By setting the number of pseudo consecutive times to 12 s per time, it becomes the same time as the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time at PT3) when the result of the special lottery when the number of holds is 0 or 1 is lost, and multiple times It is possible to make it appear as if a special lottery was held.

  In this way, since the pseudo continuous variation over the determined number of pseudo-continuations N is performed using the added value, the larger the number of pseudo-continuous times N, the larger the added value. For example, if the status value determined by the variation type determination process is 10H, the added value 0s and the number of pseudo-continuations N is also 0 (N = 0). Further, if the determined status value is 11H, the number of pseudo-continuous times N is 1 (N = 1) with the added value 12s, and if the determined status value is 12H, the number of pseudo-continuous times N is 2 with the added value 24s. (N = 2), if the determined status value is 13H, the number of pseudo-continuations N is 3 (N = 3) with the added value 36s. However, when the determined variation pattern is PT12, the pseudo continuous number N is determined to be 4 (N = 4), and the variation type determination process is not performed (no added value). For this reason, pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed in which the pseudo continuous number N is four times (N = 4) within the fluctuation time without the added value. If the quasi-continuous fluctuation continues four times, the result of the special lottery is still displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the special symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186). Regardless of the fact that the result of the special lottery is confirmed, it is determined that the winning is N, and the effect of the pseudo continuous number N being 4 (N = 4) is positioned as a premium effect. In addition, as the number of times of pseudo-continuous N increases, the result of the special lottery can be expected. The number of times of pseudo-continuous N is twice (N = 2) than that of one (N = 1). The degree of expectation that the result is a win is high, and the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery is a win is higher when the number of times of pseudo-running N is 3 times (N = 2) than when the number of pseudo-continuations N is 2 (N = 2).

  As can be understood from FIG. 67, the status value is determined to be 10H with a probability of 100% if the determined variation pattern is PT1 to PT3. If the determined variation pattern is PT4, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 90/100, and is determined to be 11H with a probability of 10 of 100. If the determined variation pattern is PT5, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 90/100, determined to be 11H with a probability of 5 of 100, determined to be 12H with a probability of 3/100, and 2/100 The probability is 13H. If the determined variation pattern is PT6, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 10/100, is determined to be 11H with a probability of 40 of 100, and is determined to be 12H with a probability of 50/100. If the determined variation pattern is PT7, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 5/100, determined to be 11H with a probability of 25 of 100, and determined to be 12H with a probability of 70/100. If the determined variation pattern is PT8, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 10/100, determined to be 11H with a probability of 20 of 100, determined to be 12H with a probability of 60/100, and 10/100. The probability is 13H. If the determined variation pattern is PT9, it is determined to be 10H with a probability of 5/100, determined to be 11H with a probability of 15 of 100, determined to be 12H with a probability of 55/100, and 25/100. The probability is 13H. If the determined variation pattern is PT10, it is determined as 11H with a probability of 5 of 100, determined as 12H with a probability of 20/100, and determined as 13H with a probability of 75/100. If the determined variation pattern is PT11, it is determined as 11H with a probability of 5/100, determined as 12H with a probability of 10/100, and determined as 13H with a probability of 85/100.

  In the effect setting process, which is the process on the peripheral control board 4140 side, first, as can be understood from FIG. 68, the variation pattern is first identified from the special figure variation pattern command (step S2500). Next, a status value is specified from the variation type command (step S2550). Then, using the variation pattern specified in step S2500 and the status value specified in step S2550, a false simulated continuous effect lottery is performed (step S2600).

  The quasi-continuous effect lottery in step S2600 is quasi-continuous that is similar in appearance to the quasi-continuous variation with respect to the quasi-continuous number N determined based on the result of the variation type determination process performed on the main control board 4100 side. It is a lottery related to the addition of fluctuating effects.贋 Pseudo continuous variation production (hereinafter, this production may be referred to as 贋 pseudo-continuous production) A series of effects related to the 贋 pseudo-continuous effect, which is derived in the order of “stop at the XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, in the middle symbol, is G times (G is the number of 贋 pseudo-ream times) during one special lottery. ) After repeating the above, “Change of middle symbol starts again → stop in the order of left and right, then stop at the same symbol → reach production → middle symbol stops and display the result of special lottery” once for the special symbol Is an effect that is performed during the fluctuation display (until the result of one special lottery is derived). In other words, unlike the pseudo-continuous effects, the pseudo-simultaneous effects can be produced in a shorter time than the pseudo-continuous effects by temporarily stopping the special symbols only for the middle symbols without stopping the left and right symbols. It is a production that can be shown as if it was performed.

  As described above, the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol may be a symbol that has been present in the middle symbol from the normal time, or it may be a pseudo-continuous variation or a fake simulation that does not normally exist in the middle symbol. It may be a symbol that appears when continuous variation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, a series of effects related to the pseudo-continuous effects is performed using the addition time determined based on the result of the variation type determination process, whereas a series of effects related to the pseudo-continuous effects is It is performed within the variation time determined by the special symbol variation pattern setting process. In other words, in this example, the number of pseudo-continuous times G performed within the variation time is added to the number of pseudo-continuous times N performed using the addition time, and the combined effect of the pseudo-continuous effect and the pseudo-simulated continuous effect ( N + G) times. In addition, as will be described in detail later, as long as the variation pattern is the same, the number of times when the result of the special lottery is a win is determined more frequently as long as the variation pattern is the same. Therefore, it is expected that the result of the special lottery will be higher than (N + G) times (N + G) times (Pseudo-continuous productions + 贋 simulations) without making the special symbol change time longer. Will be performed).

  In addition, when the number of executions of each of the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-simultaneous effect, and the (pseudo-continuous effect + the pseudo-simultaneous effect) is the same, the expected degree of winning in the special lottery is the same. It is preferable to set. However, although the philosophy is different, the quasi-continuous production is given an advantage over the quasi-continuous production. , (Pseudo-continuous production + 贋 Pseudo-continuous production) The degree of expectation may be higher for three pseudo-continuous productions than for three. Further, the pseudo-simultaneous effect is given priority over the pseudo-simultaneous effect so that, for example, the expectation is higher in the three pseudo-simulated effects than in the pseudo-simulated effect. The degree of expectation may be higher in three times (pseudo-continuous production + 贋 pseudo-continuous production) three times.

  Here, the pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. As described above, the pseudo continuous effect lottery is a lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side, and based on the variation pattern specified in step S2500 and the status value specified in step S2550, This is a lottery that determines the number of pseudo-continuous times G within a range in which the sum of the number of pseudo-continuous numbers G does not exceed 4 (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is determined to be winning).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, first, the status value specified in step S2550 is determined. If it is determined that the status value is 10H (YES in step S2610), a pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery is performed using the 10H table in FIG. 70A (step S2620). If it is determined in step S2610 that the status value is not 10H (NO in step S2610), it is determined whether the status value is 11H (step S2630). If it is determined that the status value is 11H (YES in step S2630), a pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery is performed using the 11H table in FIG. 70B (step S2640). If it is determined in step S2630 that the status value is not 11H (NO in step S2630), it is determined whether the status value is 12H (step S2650). If it is determined that the status value is 12H (YES in step S2650), a pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery is performed using the 12H table of FIG. 70 (c) (step S2660). If it is determined in step S2650 that the status value is not 12H (NO in step S2650), a pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery is performed using the 13H table in FIG. 70D (step S2670).

  Hereinafter, the false pseudo-continuous effect lottery in step S2620, step S2640, step S2660, and step S2670 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side indicates that the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1- In the case of PT3, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is always set to zero. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. If it is PT5, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 7 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 3/100. . In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 10/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 40 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 50/100. . In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 5/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 25 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 70/100. . In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 10/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 60/100. . In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 5/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 65/100. . In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined once with a probability of 25/100 and twice with a probability of 75/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false consecutive times G is determined once with a probability of 5/100 and twice with a probability of 95/100. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the number of times of pseudo-continuous N is 4 (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed), It is determined 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the number of simulated consecutive times G with respect to the number of simulated consecutive times N, it is possible not to perform the simulated series continuous lottery in the first place.

  Thus, when the status value is 10H (no pseudo-continuous), the pseudo-continuous variation is not performed, but the pseudo-simultaneous effect lottery is performed so that the pseudo-continuous number of times G can be performed. As a result, even if the pseudo continuous variation is not performed, the chance that the expectation is lost by performing the pseudo continuous variation can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 70B, the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1 when the status value is 11H (pseudo-run once), as shown in FIG. 70 (B). If it is ˜PT3, the number of false consecutive times G is always determined to be zero. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. If it is PT5, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 7 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 3/100. . In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 10/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 40 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 50/100. . In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 5/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 25 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 69/100, It is determined three times with a probability of 1/100. In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 10/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 60/100. . In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 5/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 30 of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 62/100, 3 times with a probability of 3/100. In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined once with a probability of 25/100 and twice with a probability of 75/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined once with a probability of 5/100, determined twice with a probability of 90/100, and determined 3 times with a probability of 5/100. The In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the number of times of pseudo-continuous N is 4 (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed), It is determined 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the number of simulated consecutive times G with respect to the number of simulated consecutive times N, it is possible not to perform the simulated series continuous lottery in the first place.

  Thus, when the status value is 11H (one pseudo-continuous), the pseudo-continuous effect lottery is performed so that the sum of the number of pseudo-continuous times and the number of pseudo-continuous times can be 1, 2, 3 or 4 times. Done. Thereby, in addition to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations determined on the main control board 4100 side, pseudo continuous fluctuations can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-continuations and the number of pseudo-continuations is 4 only when the result of the special lottery is winning, so the number of pseudo-continuations determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if it is not, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (C), the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1 when the status value is 12H (pseudo-continuous 2 times), as shown in FIG. 70 (C). If it is ˜PT3, the number of false consecutive times G is always determined to be zero. In the case of PT4, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 50/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 50 of 100. In the case of PT6, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 60/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 40 of 100. In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 40/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 1 in 100. In the case of PT8, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 70/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 30 of 100. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 30/100, is determined to be 1 with a probability of 67 of 100, and is determined to be 2 with a probability of 3 of 100. In the case of PT10, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 90/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 10/100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 10/100, determined as 1 with a probability of 85/100, and determined as 2 with a probability of 5 of 100. . In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the number of times of pseudo-continuous N is 4 (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed), It is determined 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the number of simulated consecutive times G with respect to the number of simulated consecutive times N, it is possible not to perform the simulated series continuous lottery in the first place.

  In this way, when the status value is 12H (pseudo-continuous 2 times), the pseudo-sequential rendering lottery is performed so that the sum of the pseudo-continuous number and the pseudo-simultaneous number of times can be 2, 3, or 4. Thereby, in addition to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations determined on the main control board 4100 side, pseudo continuous fluctuations can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-continuations and the number of pseudo-continuations is 4 only when the result of the special lottery is winning, so the number of pseudo-continuations determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if it is not, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed.

  Further, as can be understood from FIG. 67, the variation pattern of SP reach 3 is more easily selected when the result of the special lottery is a win than when it is a loss. That is, when the variation pattern of the SP reach 3 is displayed, a great expectation is given to the player. However, even if the variation pattern of the SP reach 3 is determined, it may be determined once or twice. In this case, although it is a lottery result that can be performed with a relatively high degree of expectation, a relatively low effect is executed, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 70, even if the pseudo-ream effect lottery is determined once or twice, in the case of the variation pattern of SP reach 3, a special symbol is used in the pseudo-ream effect lottery. It is easier to determine that is stopped compared to other fluctuation patterns. That is, it can be said that the 贋 pseudo-continuous effect lottery has a function of complementing the shortage in the result of the pseudo-continuous effect lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (d), the variation pattern determined on the main control board 4100 side is PT1 when the status value is 13H (pseudo three times), as shown in FIG. 70 (d). If it is any one of-PT4, PT6, PT8 and PT10 (that is, if the result of the special lottery is lost), the number of false consecutive times G is always determined to be 0. In the case of PT5, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 99/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 1 of 100. In the case of PT7, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 97/100, and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 3 of 100. In the case of PT9, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined as 0 with a probability of 95/100, and is determined as 1 with a probability of 5 of 100. In the case of PT11, the number of false pseudo-continuations G is determined to be 0 with a probability of 90/100 and is determined to be 1 with a probability of 10 of 100. In the case of PT12, since it is determined on the main control board 4100 side that the number of times of pseudo-continuous N is 4 (the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed), It is determined 0 times with a probability of 100/100. However, in the case of PT12, since it is not necessary to add the number of simulated consecutive times G with respect to the number of simulated consecutive times N, it is possible not to perform the simulated series continuous lottery in the first place.

  As described above, when the status value is 13H (pseudo-continuous 3 times), the pseudo-sequential effect lottery is performed so that the sum of the pseudo-continuous number and the pseudo-continuous number of times can be 3 times or 4 times. Thereby, in addition to the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations determined on the main control board 4100 side, pseudo continuous fluctuations can be performed, and it is possible to give the player a higher expectation. In particular, the sum of the number of pseudo-continuations and the number of pseudo-continuations is 4 only when the result of the special lottery is winning, so the number of pseudo-continuations determined on the main control board 4100 side is 4 times. Even if it is not, it is possible to perform an effect in which it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed.

  By the way, in this example, as described above, when the pseudo continuous variation is performed four times, the result of the special lottery is win at this time (the time when the result of the special lottery has not yet been finalized). The fact is determined (the minimum condition for determining that the result of the special lottery is winning is the pseudo-continuous number of 4 times). Furthermore, even if the number of pseudo-continuous times determined on the main control board 4100 side is less than four times, the result of the lottery simulation lottery on the peripheral control board 4140 side is that When the sum of the number of times is four times, three times of pseudo continuous variation and one time of pseudo continuous variation are performed during the display of one variation of the special symbol, and an effect related to such variation is performed. At that time (when the result of the special lottery has not yet been finalized), it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is winning. In this example, the peripheral control is performed even if the variation pattern of the variation number PT12 (the number of pseudo continuous operations is 4) is not determined as a result of the special symbol variation pattern setting process performed on the main control board 4100 side. Depending on the result of the simulated lottery effect lottery performed on the side of the substrate 4140, it is possible to execute a variable effect in which it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the special lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed. Yes.

  In this example, not only when the quasi-continuous variation is performed four times, but also when the sum of the quasi-continuous number and the quasi-continuous number of times is performed four times. It is configured to confirm that the result of the special lottery is a win when the result of the lottery has not yet been confirmed and displayed. It is also possible to perform a pseudo-sequential production lottery in such a way that the number of times is not possible, and to give a further premium feeling to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of the number of pseudo-continuous times 4.

  Further, in this example, the number of times of false pseudo-continuous is not determined to be four in the false pseudo-continuous effect lottery performed on the peripheral control board 4140 side. That is, even if the number of times of pseudo-continuations determined on the main control board 4100 side is 0 (result of the variation type determination process is 10H), The number of times is not determined to be four. This is because the reach effect is started after a lapse of a short time such as 12 s after the change of all the symbols in the middle left and right. In other words, when performing pseudo continuous variation, in order to make it appear as if multiple special lotteries have been performed, the timing for temporarily stopping the middle symbol in the pseudo continuous variation is PT1 (4s) or PT2 that is a loss variation. It is preferable to correspond to the fluctuation time of (8 s).贋 When the number of simulated consecutive times is 4, if the timing at which the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the quasi-continuous variation completely corresponds to the variation time of the loss variation, the reach effect starts after the variation of all symbols starts It will take at least 16 seconds to be done. Therefore, when the number of 贋 pseudo continuous times is 4, a divergence occurs between the timing at which the middle symbol is temporarily stopped in the 贋 pseudo continuous variation and the fluctuation time of PT1 or PT2, and the 贋 pseudo continuous variation is It becomes difficult to make it look as if multiple special lotteries have been made.

  In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is not performed four times (the number of times that it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a win) is not performed, but the first PT (3 s), the first Prepares 4 patterns of loss variation such as 2PT (6s), 3rd PT (9s), 4th PT (12s) with different variation times (the same number of patterns as the number of times that the result of the special lottery is confirmed) If this is done, it is possible to perform four times of pseudo continuous variation.

  Next, a decorative symbol variation process which is a process on the peripheral control board 4140 side will be briefly described with reference to FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is a pseudo continuous variation (step S2700). If it is determined that the variation is pseudo continuous variation (YES in step S2700), it is determined whether the variation is pseudo continuous variation (step S2710). If it is determined that it is 贋 pseudo continuous variation (YES in step S2710), pseudo / 贋 pseudo continuous variation control processing in which both pseudo continuous variation and 贋 pseudo continuous variation are performed is executed (step S2720). If it is determined in step S2710 that it is not pseudo continuous variation (NO in step S2710), pseudo continuous variation control processing is executed (step S2730). If it is determined in step S2700 that it is not pseudo continuous (NO in step S2700), it is determined whether or not it is pseudo continuous variation (step S2740). Here, if it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation (YES in step S2740), the pseudo continuous variation control process is executed (step S2750). If it is determined in step S2740 that there is no pseudo continuous variation (NO in step S2740), normal variation control processing is executed (step S2760). As described above, the quasi-continuous variation control process is a process of performing quasi-continuous variation using the addition time determined based on the result of the variation type determination process. Is a process of performing pseudo continuous variation within the variation time determined by the special symbol variation pattern setting process. The pseudo / 贋 pseudo continuous variation control process is a process of performing pseudo continuous variation using the addition time and performing 贋 pseudo continuous variation within the variation time. The normal variation control process is a process of performing variation with the variation pattern determined by the special symbol variation pattern setting process without performing pseudo continuous variation.

  Here, regarding the degree of expectation when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol (that is, when any one of pseudo continuous variation, pseudo continuous variation, and pseudo / simulated continuous variation is performed) explain.

  The ST1 effect, ST2 effect, ST3 effect, ST4 effect, and ST5 effect shown in FIG. 72 are all effects that indicate the degree of expectation, and the high degree of expectation is ST1 effect <ST2 effect <ST3 effect <ST4 effect < ST5 production. In FIG. 72, the ST1 effect, the ST2 effect, the ST3 effect, the ST4 effect, and the ST5 effect are simply indicated as ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, and ST5 with the effects omitted. Further, the left symbol stops after 10 s from the start of the decorative symbol change, and the right symbol stops after 11 s. Then, after 12 seconds, if the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed. If the reach effect is performed, the reach effect is started and the decorative pattern fluctuates thereafter. continue. However, although not shown in FIG. 72, if the variable PT1, the last symbol to be stopped stops after 4s, and if it is variable PT2, the last symbol to stop stops after 8s.

  First, the degree of expectation for the step-up effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the ST1 effect, the ST1 effect is performed after the symbol variation is started, and then the ST1 finalized effect is displayed, and it is determined that the program does not advance to ST2 and thereafter. In this case, the expectation is an expectation corresponding to ST1. In the ST2 effect, the ST1 effect is performed after the symbol variation is started, and then the step up to ST2 is performed, the ST2 finalized effect is displayed, and it is determined that the process does not proceed after ST3. In this case, the expectation is the expectation corresponding to ST2. In the ST3 effect, after the symbol change is started, ST1 → ST2 → ST3 is stepped up, and then the ST3 finalized effect is displayed, and it is determined that the program does not advance to ST4 or later. In this case, the expectation is an expectation corresponding to ST3. In the ST4 effect, after the symbol variation is started, the ST1 → ST2 → ST3 → ST4 is stepped up, and then the ST4 finalized effect is displayed, and it is determined that the program does not advance to ST4 and thereafter. In this case, the expectation is the expectation corresponding to ST4. In the ST5 effect, after the symbol variation starts, the ST1 → ST2 → ST3 → ST4 → ST5 is stepped up, and then the ST5 finalized effect with the highest expectation is displayed in this example. When the ST1 finalized effect or the ST2 finalized effect is displayed, for example, a loss variation of PT3 is often performed. When the ST3 finalized effect is displayed, it is determined in this example that the reach effect is performed, so at least normal reach fluctuation is performed. When the ST4 finalized effect is displayed, the degree of expectation that the SP reach effect is performed is high. When the ST5 confirmed effect is displayed, the SP reach effect is confirmed. In particular, when the SP reach 3 is displayed, as can be understood from FIG. 67, the expectation that the result of the special lottery is a win is extremely high. In this way, when the ST effect is stepped up after the decorative pattern change starts, the expectation increases accordingly.

  Next, the relationship between each variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous variation, and the pseudo / simulated continuous variation and the step-up effect will be described with reference to FIG. The effect (b) is a diagram showing that the ST3 confirmed effect is displayed when the ST2 confirmed effect has already been displayed, but the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as the special symbol. . That is, even if the step effect that has been confirmed and displayed is STM (M is an integer), the ST (M + 1) confirmed effect that is one step higher can be displayed in response to a temporary stop with a special symbol. . (B) shows that the ST5 confirmed effect is displayed when the ST2 confirmed effect is already displayed, but the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. . That is, even if the step effect that is confirmed and displayed is STM (M is an integer), the ST (M + 3) final effect that is higher by 3 steps can be displayed (steps can be skipped) triggered by a temporary stop with a special symbol. )It is shown that. Here, an example is described in which a three-step higher finalized effect is displayed, but it goes without saying that, for example, a two-step higher ST (M + 2) finalized effect may be displayed. The production of (c) is further expected due to the fact that the medium design has been temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, although a relatively high expectation effect such as ST4 finalization has already been displayed. It is a figure which shows that ST5 finalization effect with high is displayed. The effect of (d) is a diagram showing a case where the middle symbol is the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol and there are two chances to make a temporary stop. In this case, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. Thereafter, the middle symbol again temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, and the ST5 finalized effect is displayed.

  As described above, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, a step effect having a higher expectation than the already displayed ST finalized effect is displayed. That is, every time the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, the expectation for the special lottery increases. In addition, as described above, the maximum chance that the middle symbol temporarily stops with the “XTREAM” symbol as the special symbol is four times, and when the middle symbol temporarily stops with the “XTREAM” symbol as the special symbol, At this point, the jackpot is finalized. The middle symbol is temporarily stopped with the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. Pseudo continuous variation, 贋 pseudo continuous variation, pseudo quasi continuous variation and quasi continuous variation are performed. However, in any case, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol, a step effect having a higher expectation than the ST confirmed effect already displayed is displayed.

  In addition to this example, in a gaming machine in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed multiple times in a single special lottery symbol change, each time a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in a single special lottery symbol change, an ST1 effect is performed. Are executed step by step, and an ST confirmed effect having a higher expectation than the ST confirmed effect executed in the previous pseudo-continuous effect is always displayed. On the other hand, in the pseudo-simultaneous effect, the expectation is higher than the ST confirmed effect before the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with the special symbol, without starting from the ST1 effect after the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with the special symbol. The ST confirmed effect is always displayed. That is, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with a special symbol, in this example, the ST determination effect with a higher expectation level is necessarily satisfied.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect mode when the pseudo continuous variation, the pseudo continuous variation, and the pseudo / simulated continuous variation are performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900.

  First, a series of effects in pseudo continuous variation will be described. The pseudo continuous variation proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (i), for example. FIG. 73 shows a case where two pseudo continuous fluctuations are performed.

  As described above, the pseudo continuous variation is performed using the added time. (A) is a figure which shows that all of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol have stopped. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in (b), all the symbols are changing. Then, stop in the order of left symbol → right symbol. (C) is a diagram showing that the left symbol has stopped. Here, the illustration in which the right symbol is stopped is omitted. In this example, the left symbol is stopped in the order of the right symbol, but the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously. After the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol as shown in FIG. At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped is not displayed. Although not shown in the figure, the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol that temporarily stops at the middle symbol is displayed from the top center of the screen in the same way as the scroll display while normal symbol variation is performed by scrolling up and down. It is moved and displayed toward the stop position in the approximate center. In this way, it is possible to give an impression that the XTREAM symbol suddenly appears by making the special symbol that temporarily stops to the middle symbol in the pseudo-sequential variation to resemble the normal symbol variation. Then, as shown in (e), an effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Thereafter, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (f), all symbols are changing as shown in (g). After that, although not shown, the operation stops in the order of left symbol → right symbol. After the left symbol and the right symbol stop, as shown in (h), the middle symbol temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. Then, as shown in (i), an effect image indicating that the second pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Then, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (j), all symbols are changing as shown in (k). After the quasi-continuous variation is performed twice in this way, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped as shown in (l), and when the reach effect is performed, the reach of the middle symbol continues. When the effect image is displayed and the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed.

  Next, a series of effects in pseudo continuous variation will be described.贋 Pseudo continuous variation proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 74 (a) to 74 (k), for example. FIG. 74 shows a case where two pseudo continuous changes are performed.

  As described above, the quasi-continuous variation is performed within the variation time. (A) is a figure which shows that all of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol have stopped. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in (b), (c) and (d), all the symbols are changing. In addition, (b) is a figure which shows ST1 effect, (c) is a figure which shows ST2 effect, (d) is ST2 finalization effect. In this example, after the ST2 finalized effect is displayed, the middle symbol is a special symbol “XTREAM” as shown in FIG. Stop. At this time, a mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are changed is not displayed. Therefore, in appearance, it is difficult to distinguish from the case where the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol in the pseudo continuous variation (see FIG. 73 (d)). Although not shown in the figure, the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol that temporarily stops at the middle symbol is displayed from the top center of the screen in the same way as the scroll display while normal symbol variation is performed by scrolling up and down. It is moved and displayed toward the stop position in the approximate center. In this way, as in the case of pseudo continuous variation, the impression that the XTREAM symbol suddenly came out by making the special symbol that temporarily stops to the middle symbol in the pseudo continuous variation resemble the normal symbol variation. Can be given. Then, as shown in (f), an effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. At this time, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance (see FIG. 73 (e)) when the effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Then, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect of (g) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol. In this ST3 finalization effect, all symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the case of 贋 pseudo continuous variation, the middle symbol temporarily stops at a special symbol while the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained, so all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol as in the case of pseudo continuous variation. Is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 73 (f)) is not displayed. After that, with the fluctuation of the left symbol and the right symbol maintained, as shown in (h), the middle symbol temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. At this time, since the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are fluctuated is not displayed, the appearance is distinguished from the case where the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol in the pseudo continuous variation (see FIG. 73 (h)). Is difficult. Then, as shown in (i), the effect image indicating that the second pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Also at this time, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance (see FIG. 73 (i)) when the effect image indicating that the second pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Then, although the ST3 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST5 finalized effect of (j) is displayed (ST4 skip) when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol. In this ST5 finalized effect, all symbols are variably displayed. Even after the effect image indicating that the second quasi-pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed, the effect image in which all symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed because the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained. Not. Then, after the 贋 pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, as shown in (k), when the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is performed, the reach effect is performed while the change of the middle symbol is continued. When the image is displayed and the reach effect is not performed, the middle symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In FIG. 74, since the ST5 finalized effect is displayed, the reach effect is performed.

  In this way, unlike the pseudo continuous variation, the middle symbol temporarily stops at the special symbol while the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained. Therefore, while shortening the variation time, when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped with a special symbol, it gives a high sense of expectation to the player by efficiently displaying the finalized effect for the step with higher expectation. It becomes possible. In addition, a special symbol (both “XTREAM” symbols) common to the pseudo continuous variation and the 贋 pseudo continuous variation is used, and the display mode when the middle symbol stops at the special symbol is used. Since it is difficult or difficult to distinguish between pseudo continuous variation and 贋 pseudo continuous variation, even if pseudo continuous variation is not performed, the player has the same expectation as when pseudo continuous variation was performed. It becomes possible to give to. Needless to say, a symbol displayed as a special symbol does not necessarily have to be a middle symbol.

  Finally, a series of effects in the pseudo / simultaneous continuous variation in which both the pseudo continuous variation and the pseudo continuous variation are performed will be described. Pseudo / 贋 pseudo continuous variation proceeds in the order shown in FIGS. 75 (a) to (u), for example. In FIG. 75, 贋 pseudo continuous variation (hereinafter referred to as “first quasi continuous variation”) → pseudo continuous variation → 変 動 quasi continuous variation (hereinafter referred to as “second quasi continuous variation”), A case where the middle symbol is “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol and temporarily stops three times is shown.

  As described above, the pseudo continuous variation is performed using the added time, and the pseudo continuous variation is performed within the variation time. (F) is an effect image indicating that the first quasi-continuous variation is started, (j) is an effect image indicating that the quasi-continuous variation is started, and (s) is a second effect. It is an effect image which shows that pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation is started.

  (A) is a figure which shows that all of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol have stopped. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in (b), (c) and (d), all the symbols are changing. (B) is a diagram showing an ST1 effect, (c) is a diagram showing an ST2 effect, and (d) is an ST2 finalized effect. In this example, after the ST2 finalized effect is displayed, the middle symbol is a special symbol “XTREAM” as shown in FIG. Stop. At this time, a mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are changed is not displayed. Then, as shown in (f), an effect image indicating that the first pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. Then, although the ST2 finalized effect has already been displayed, the ST3 finalized effect of (g) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol. In this ST3 finalization effect, all symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the case of 贋 pseudo continuous variation, the middle symbol temporarily stops at a special symbol while the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained, so all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol as in the case of pseudo continuous variation. Is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 73 (f)) is not displayed. Then, stop in the order of left symbol → right symbol. (H) is a diagram showing that the left symbol has stopped. Here, the illustration in which the right symbol is stopped is omitted. In this example, the left symbol is stopped in the order of the right symbol, but the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously. After the left symbol and the right symbol stop, as shown in (i), the middle symbol temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol. At this time, the mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped is not displayed. Then, as shown in (j), an effect image indicating that pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. However, here, it is not distinguished whether the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started or whether the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started, and it is indicated that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is the second time together with the pseudo continuous fluctuation. Thereafter, after displaying the effect image in which all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are temporarily stopped as shown in (k), all symbols are changing as shown in (l). Then, when the pseudo continuous variation is started, unlike the case where the pseudo continuous variation is started, although the ST1 effect is started as shown in (m), the confirmed effect (here ST3 is displayed). It is assured that it will advance to a higher level than the final stage. Note that (n) is an ST2 effect, (o) is an ST3 effect, (p) is an ST4 effect, and (q) is an ST4 finalized effect. Thereafter, with the left symbol and right symbol fluctuations maintained, the middle symbol temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol as shown in (r). Then, as shown in (s), the effect image indicating that the (second) pseudo continuous variation is started is displayed. However, here, it is not distinguished whether the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started or whether the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started, and it is indicated that it is the third time together with the first pseudo continuous fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. . Then, although the ST4 confirmed effect is already displayed, the ST5 confirmed effect of (t) is displayed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the special symbol. In this ST5 finalized effect, all symbols are variably displayed. Even after the effect image indicating that the third time is started together with the first 贋 pseudo continuous variation and the pseudo continuous variation is displayed, the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained, so that all the symbols are displayed. The effect image that is temporarily stopped is not displayed. After that, as shown in (u), when the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is performed, the reach effect image is displayed in a state where the change of the middle symbol is continued, and the reach effect is not performed. The middle symbol stops and the result of the special lottery is displayed. In FIG. 75, since the ST5 finalized effect is displayed, the reach effect is performed.

  In this way, in a series of effects in the pseudo-simultaneous continuous variation, when the middle symbol temporarily stops at the “XTREAM” symbol as the special symbol while the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained (FIG. 75 ( e) and FIG. 75 (r)), and when the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped at the “XTREAM” symbol as a special symbol (FIG. 75 (i)). The display mode is indistinguishable or difficult. Further, an effect image (FIG. 75 (g) and FIG. 75 (s)) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is started, and an effect image (FIG. 75 (j)) indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is started. Can distinguish the number of times of 贋 pseudo continuous variation and quasi continuous variation together, but cannot distinguish or difficult whether 贋 pseudo continuous variation starts or pseudo continuous variation starts Display mode. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that combines the pseudo interlocking fluctuation and the pseudo pseudo continuous fluctuation over a number of times that is greater than the number of times of the pseudo continuous N determined on the main control board 4100 side without increasing the fluctuation time. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the degree of expectation corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive times N determined on the main control board 4100 side.

  In addition, until now, it has been the mainstream that pseudo continuous variation is started when the last stopped symbol is a special symbol, but in this embodiment, the variation of the left symbol and the right symbol is maintained. In the state, only the middle symbol is stopped by the special symbol, and the pseudo continuous variation is started. This gives the player the impression that the middle symbol, which is not originally stopped, suddenly stops at the special symbol, and the quasi-continuous variation starts and the expectation level is stepped up. You can also.

  Further, in the conventional pseudo continuous variation, every time the pseudo continuous number increases, the step-up effect is executed from the ST1 effect which is the first stage in each pseudo continuous variation. And the expectation-giving timing when the step-up effect reaches the final stage (that is, the time for which pseudo continuous variation is performed). In this respect, in the 贋 pseudo continuous variation of this example, the number of times that the special symbol was displayed (pseudo continuous number + 贋 pseudo continuous number) increased due to the temporary stop of the middle symbol at the XTREAM symbol as a special symbol. After the expectation level is given, the fact that the step-up effect stage has been completed is displayed, so the expectation-giving timing and the step-up effect stage due to the increase in the number of times the special symbol is displayed have been established. The expectation timing given by the display indicating the effect is shorter than before (substantially the same timing), it is possible to give the player a collective expectation, and understand that the expectation has increased It becomes easy to do.

  In this example, the determination of the variation pattern and the determination of the number of pseudo-continuations are performed by separate lottery, and an added value is added to the variation time according to the number of pseudo-continuations, and the added continuous time is used for pseudo-continuation. Although the production is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For the case where the pseudo-continuous number is also determined by incorporating the pseudo-continuous number into the variation pattern and the variation pattern is determined, the peripheral control board 4140 side also determines the pseudo-continuous number. An effect lottery may be performed, and a false pseudo-continuous effect may be performed using the variation time.

[13. Special figure look-ahead production]
Next, a pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the variable display will be described before the special symbol variable display is started. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment is stored in the starting memory at a predetermined timing until the normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening and the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is digested. It is configured to be able to execute a continuous look-ahead effect that suggests the expected degree of variation display based on it.

  The normal prefetching effect displays, for example, a hold display of the start memory to be prefetched in a mode different from normal. In addition, the continuous pre-reading effect is configured such that the mode of the hold display of the start memory to be pre-read changes whenever the start memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed. In addition to changing the mode of the hold display of the start memory, a specific effect in story reach or pseudo-continuous change may be executed at a timing when the mode of the hold display is changed.

[13-1. Special figure prefetch effect control process]
First, the special view prefetch effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control part steady process in the peripheral control part power-on process (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of special figure prefetch effect control processing in the present embodiment. In the special figure prefetch effect control process, a process for executing the normal prefetch effect and a process for determining whether to execute the continuous prefetch effect are executed. The special figure prefetch effect control process may be executed when a prefetch effect command is received in the reception command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not a prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). When the pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the pre-reading effect is not executed, and thus the special figure pre-reading effect control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the normal prefetch effect based on the content of the prefetch effect command corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched. Is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal prefetch effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable symbol special display corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the normal prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins at the start opening, except for the case where the number of held start memories is 0, the display mode of the hold display is maintained regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed. Change at a predetermined rate.

  When the pre-reading effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”, but when the pre-reading effect is normally executed, the display color of the hold display is predetermined according to the degree of expectation from “white” to the big hit. Change to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” with the probability of (FIG. 77). Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the hold display color is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a loss.

  When the reserved display color is selected, the effect control program executes a normal prefetch effect setting process for setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the hold display, and settings are made to output sound effects, turn on the lamp, and move the feature at the change timing. Thereafter, the prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of normal prefetch effects from being executed for one start-up memory.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous prefetch effect is executed only when the normal prefetch effect is executed. That is, the player comes to have a sense of expectation by the normal look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening, and has a greater sense of expectation when the mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses. Note that the continuous prefetching effect may be executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. For example, when the number of reserved start-up memories is large, the continuous prefetching effect is executed without executing the normal prefetching effect. You may do it. In particular, it is effective when the upper start opening and the lower start opening can always be awarded, and these start openings can be alternately arranged so that up to eight start memories can be held.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the normal prefetch effect has been executed (step S2005). When the normal prefetch effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, when the color of the hold display remains “white”, the special prefetching is not performed without executing the continuous prefetch effect. The effect control process ends.

  When the normal prefetch effect is executed (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program uses the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (based on various information included in the prefetch effect command received from the main control board 4100). 77), the corresponding information is acquired (step S2006), and whether or not the continuous prefetching effect is executed is selected (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern and winning information. The starting memory number (the number of special symbol actuated balls) is included in the special symbol memory command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous prefetch effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous prefetch effect lottery table in the present embodiment. The continuous prefetching effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start memories is 3 or more because the hold display mode changes over a plurality of variations. In addition, when the result of the variable display based on the start-up memory is a big hit (or a possibility of a big hit), it is set so that the continuous pre-reading effect is easily executed and the number of continuous pre-reads is likely to increase. .

  In addition, the lottery (step S2007) whether or not to execute the continuous prefetch effect is drawn based on the continuous prefetch effect execution probability. In addition, when reach does not occur in the start memory to be prefetched, it is set so that the continuous prefetch effect is not executed.

  When executing the continuous prefetch effect (the result of step S2007 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous prefetch effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of executions of continuous prefetching effects is set as the number of remaining effects (number of remaining prefetchings) (step S2009).

  Furthermore, the effect control program sets a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the continuous prefetch effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, a continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated.

[13-2. Continuous prefetch effect setting process]
Next, the continuous prefetch effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. The continuous prefetch effect setting process is a process for controlling the prefetch effect for the start-up memory that is the target of the prefetch effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the start display hold display of the prefetch effect target is changed at the timing when the start memory for executing the variable display game is executed prior to the start memory of the prefetch effect target. Execute the process.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous prefetch effect setting process of the present embodiment. The continuous prefetch effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 76) when the continuous prefetch effect is executed. If the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous prefetch effect processing is terminated because the continuous prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random value for selecting the prefetch effect (specific effect) to be executed ( Step S2102). Further, based on the acquired random value, the specific effect mode is acquired from the continuous prefetch effect mode selection table (FIG. 80) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, a setting for executing a continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) is performed.

  The continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment changes the shape of the hold display according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous prefetch effect is executed in a state where the normal prefetch effect is executed, the shape is controlled so that the shape changes in a state where the color of the hold display is changed. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous prefetch effect mode selection table for selecting a hold display mode in the continuous prefetch effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a random number range is set for each specific effect. For example, when the production selection pattern is “pattern 2”, when the random value is 0 to 200, the specific production 1 is used, when the random value is 201 to 400, the specific production 2 is used,. The specific effect 6 is selected.

  In Pattern 1, the specific effects 5 and 6 with high expectation are not selected, and in Pattern 1, all the specific effects can be executed. A range of random numbers is set so that the production is difficult to select. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 with a low expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 with a high expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 78, pattern 1 is selected with a variation pattern with low expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the variation display game is a big hit.

  If the same shape as the previously executed continuous prefetch effect is selected, it may be assumed that the continuous prefetch effect has not been executed, and the game may be continued as it is, or the hold display blinks temporarily. For example, the player may be notified that the continuous prefetching effect has been executed.

  Now, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all continuous prefetch effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S2106 is “Yes”), since all the continuous prefetch effects have been executed, the continuous prefetch effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous prefetch effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not zero (the result of step S2106 is “No”), that is, when all the continuous prefetch effects are not executed, the effect control program determines the random number value obtained in the process of step S2102. Is set to the lower limit of the random number (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted by the production selection pattern “pattern 3” is “350”, the specific production 3 is selected, so that the specific production 1 or the specific production 2 is not selected, that is, the fall. Is set to a lower limit value “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected as the lower limit value of the random number. As a result, when the next continuous prefetch effect is executed, a random number value in the range of “201” to “1000” is extracted in the process of step S2102 and more than the effect previously executed in the continuous prefetch effect. It is possible to prevent the performance with low expectation from being executed.

  In the continuous prefetching effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the hold display changes step by step. For example, when the production selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of continuous prefetching executions is “3”, the lower limit is set to “0” and the upper limit is set to “1” so that the first specific production executed is 1 to 4. 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed the second time is set to “201”, and the upper limit value is set to “800”. That is, the specific effect is set to be selected from 3 to 5. In this way, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation always increases (so as to rise), and even when the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is used in the next (last) specific effect. Can be selected, and the specific effect can be executed so as to prevent the fall and reliably increase the degree of expectation. Note that setting the player to rise reliably makes it possible to greatly increase the player's expectation. Therefore, the player may be controlled to rise reliably only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Example of production]
With the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect so that no downfall occurs in the continuous prefetch effect. Next, a specific example of the continuous prefetch effect will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of the screen transition of the continuous prefetch effect according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 81A shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed in a state where the pre-reading effect is not executed. FIG. 81 (B) shows a state in which a normal prefetch effect is executed as a result of winning a game ball in the upper start opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 81 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the decorative design is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the held start memory is digested, and the next variation display is started. At this time, the first continuous prefetch effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 81 (D) to (G), the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed every time the held start memory is digested and the variable display is started. Change.

  Then, when the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started (FIG. 81 (H)), reach occurs (FIG. 81 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 81 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by making it possible to execute a pre-reading effect based on the progress of the game (changing the effect mode), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation in the process of continuing the game. Is possible. In particular, with respect to a variable display game that is executed after a pre-reading effect (normal pre-reading effect) is executed at the timing when a game ball is won at the start opening and before the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect is consumed. There is a possibility that the gaming interest will be reduced, but it is possible to continuously increase the player's expectation by changing the mode of the hold display every time the variable display game is executed. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modified example of special figure prefetching effect]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure prefetch effect control]
It is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetch effect and the continuous prefetch effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the hold display mode (color) changes at the timing when the game ball is won at the start opening, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (continuous look-ahead effect). The mode (shape) of the hold display changes during digestion. In this case, it is determined at the timing when the game ball wins at the start opening whether or not the continuous prefetch effect is executed, and the content of the specific effect (change in the hold display) is drawn at the time of the hold digestion.

  On the other hand, the contents (scenarios) of all the specific effects may be drawn at the time of starting winning a prize like story reach. For example, all the specific effects are drawn by lottery in the special figure prefetch effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 76). In the process (step S1408) of setting the prefetch effect execution flag in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be drawn.

  In addition, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the variable display is being executed at the time of starting winning, the number of continuous prefetch effects is set to 1, and when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, the consecutive prefetch effects lottery table ( 78) may be selected based on the continuous prefetch effect mode (all patterns may be covered by the continuous prefetch effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first prefetch effect (same as the normal prefetch effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, when the number of pre-reading effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of starting winning, and the mode of the hold display does not change after that, it may be a very low expectation effect. In other words, the greater the number of changes in the holding mode, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. However, in the case of only one time, the degree of expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special figure 2 priority digestion]
In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the upper start opening 2101, a first special figure change display game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the upper special display 1185, and a game ball wins at the lower start opening 2102. In this case, the second special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won at the lower start port 2102, the variable display is started in preference to the case where the game ball is won at the upper start port 2101. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect is executed based on the start memory in which the game ball wins the upper start port 2101, if the game ball wins the lower start port 2102, the start memory for the pre-read effect is delayed. Become.

  As described above, when the change display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. Moreover, the specific effect based on the lottery scenario may be executed, and the specific effect to be executed last may be continuously executed for the interrupted amount.

  In addition, the scenario may be reselected for the amount of interruption. At this time, a random number range may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the executed specific effect so that the content of the effect does not fall, and the scenario may be newly drawn, or the executed scenario is ignored. Alternatively, a random number range may be initialized to newly draw a scenario.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the lower start port 2102, the specific effect may be executed only for the variable display corresponding to the start memory won at the upper start port 2101 without executing the specific effect.

  Further, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are configured to be executable simultaneously, for example, a specific effect is provided in accordance with the execution of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Just do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the normal symbol is won, the starting opening solenoid 2105 is driven and the movable piece 2106 is opened and closed, so that a game ball can be won in the lower starting opening 2102. However, when the game ball wins alternately at the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are executed alternately, an interruption is generated. Does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variable display game is executed. However, since the variable display for a maximum of eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished from each other. It becomes possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period of time, and it is possible to execute effects rich in variations.

[13-4-3. Modified example of special figure pre-reading effect]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a special structure or natural object may be placed behind the decorative pattern or character. For example, a cloud may be displayed and the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Variation of random number lottery]
In the example of production described above, it is configured to prevent falling by changing the range (upper limit value, lower limit value) for generating random numbers. However, it is also possible to prevent falling by other methods. Good. A case will be described in which pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected.

  For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, keeping the range from “0” to “1000”), the specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by a process such as calculation. May be. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. To explain such an example, in order to prevent a fall, a setting is made so that random numbers are generated in a range from “0” to “600”. Here, random numbers are generated in the range from “0” to “1000” and multiplied by “600/1000” (rounded down to the decimal point) to generate random numbers in the range from “0” to “600”. be able to.

  In addition, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range from “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as the random value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the random number variation is biased. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range is different. (In this case, 600−400 = 200) is added to the random number value (that is, the overlapping range is changed from “200” to “600”) so that the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectation is increased. Thus, the player's expectation may be increased.

  As another example, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “1000”, a random number generated in the range from “0” to “100” is generated 10 times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number ranging from “0” to “1000”. By configuring in this way, by setting and adding the number of random numbers generated according to the range of random numbers to be generated, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of random numbers actually generated constant it can. Further, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, a random number in the range from “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying the random number generated in the range from “0” to “100” by 10. Although detailed distribution cannot be performed, the same result can be obtained if the random number is a uniform random number. Further, the random number extraction method may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the random number extracted may be adjusted as necessary.

  Further, after extracting a random number for selecting a specific effect to be executed first, a random number for selecting a subsequent specific effect may be added to a random number for selecting a preceding specific effect. . At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the added random number value does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be rounded down.

[15. Tolerance of fall (break of law)
[15-1. Example of production]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effects continuously executed are configured to prevent the decline in the expectation level of the contents of the effects. However, even if the fall does not occur, the result of the variable display is not necessarily a big hit. In addition, when a specific production with a high expectation level is first executed, the flow of the subsequent production is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be enhanced.

  In view of this, a description will be given of a modified example in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a fall is allowed and a change is made in the effect pattern that is normally executed. The condition for allowing the fall may be determined, for example, according to the gaming state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display and the operating state (short time state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, the random number generation range is not adjusted when there is a high probability that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (high probability state, probability variation state), or when the player is in a favorable state such as a short time state. The fall may be allowed. On the contrary, in a state that is not advantageous to the player other than the probability variation state or the short time state, the fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

  Moreover, the fall may be allowed only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. In other words, the player can recognize that the big hit is decided on the contrary when the effect that the expectation level is lowered is executed. As described above, when an effect that is not executed in a normal flow is executed, the expectation level is increased, so that the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be enhanced. It is also possible to allow the fall (with a low probability) during normal times while controlling the fall to be difficult to occur, and to increase the probability that the fall will occur when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to allow the fall depending on the variation pattern, not the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after quasi-continuous fluctuation, etc.) occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, the fall may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. In this way, instead of the result of the variable display game, whether or not the fall is allowed may be associated with the contents of the effect.

  Further, the fall may be allowed by the reliability of the variation pattern when the result of the variation display game is a big hit. For example, the high reliability variation pattern (reach) is set to have a higher possibility of a fall than when the low reliability variation pattern (reach) is selected. Conversely, the low reliability variation pattern (reach) may be more likely to cause a fall than when the high reliability variation pattern (reach) is selected.

  In addition, when the obscure mode is executed in which the probability state of the variable display game is not clearly notified whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probabilistic state after the big hit game is finished, the random number is limited only when the actual probability state is the normal state. The generation range may be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is a probabilistic state, the winning probability of the variable display game is high even if a fall occurs, and as a result, the player is less discouraged, and if the normal state, the fall occurs. Therefore, the player will be less discouraged by directing the story reach. Conversely, only in the case of the probability variation state, the random number generation range may be adjusted to prevent the fall. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the occurrence of a fall.

  Furthermore, in the unclear mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when a fall occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Also, it is possible to set two types of modes: a mode for adjusting the random number generation range to the indistinct mode and a mode for not adjusting the random number generation range. Further, these modes may be selected by the player. With this configuration, the player can select whether the probability state can be recognized at an early stage or an effect with less disappointment can be executed.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, the control that allows falling is described. In the present embodiment, the random number generation range has been adjusted in order to prevent falling, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, when the fall is allowed, the upper limit value or lower limit value of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that it will not fall, but when a fall is generated as a big hit notification effect, a range of random numbers may be set so as to always cause a fall. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set so as to return to a predetermined level instead of the specified value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability of occurrence and the stage of the fall.

  Further, as described above, random numbers with a biased distribution may be generated by overlappingly generating a predetermined range of random numbers. In this case, the occurrence probability of the fall (rising) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range as a range where the fall occurs or conversely, as a range where the rise occurs. Further, the range of random numbers generated by setting the initial value, minimum value, and maximum value of a random number counter may be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by 1 at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing). However, the value to be added may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal gaming state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability variation state). In this way, by changing the update method of the random number counter, it is possible to change the occurrence frequency of fall depending on the gaming state.

[16. Processing when power is turned off]
Here, in the received command analysis processing, processing when a power-off command or a power-on command is received will be described.

  As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted to the main control board 4100 when the external power supply is stopped. Before the power interruption command is transmitted, as described above, a power failure warning signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is executed, so that processing such as command backup is performed. Is executed.

  In the peripheral control board 4140, processing according to a mode in which the power is shut off is executed. Specifically, when power supply from the outside stops and power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, power supply is cut off only to the main control board 4100. In this case, the power supply may be cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is powered off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to factors such as poor wiring contact, game control on the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is not lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, the hot start is performed as described above. The production control is resumed (continued).

  Even when the effect control is resumed by hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply is temporarily cut off. For example, the power supply cutoff notification may display an initial screen when the power is turned on, or may display a screen notifying that the power supply is shut off.

  In addition, there is a possibility that a deviation may occur between the time measurement (timer) in the main control board 4100 and the time measurement in the peripheral control board 4140 due to the power interruption. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol variation display on the main control board 4100 and the decorative symbol variation display on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbols ends later, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received. Further, when it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of variation, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than the jackpot, or may be a symbol dedicated to when a power failure occurs.

  Further, when the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement shift may be corrected at the timing of receiving the big prize closing display command, the ending command, or the like indicating the shift to the next round.

  If the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written in the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the effect control is resumed as a cold start.

  When an effect (variation pattern) with a specific effect is executed at the timing when the effect control is resumed as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the scenario lottery result may be discarded and the scenario may be re-drawn. When lottery scenarios are executed at the time of execution of each specific production, the scenario for executing the following specific production until the timing when the last specific production is all finished must be selected so that no flaw occurs in the content of each specific production. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be executed. Note that, in any of the cold start and the hot start, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply to the peripheral control board is cut off.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is shut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) when the power is shut off. Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is resumed, a command for notifying the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with a power-on command. The command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

  If the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the currently executed effect, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect that the player does not misidentify is executed. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect that is being executed is, for example, a state in which the result of stopping the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, a round effect during a big hit game, or the like. Examples of effects that the player does not misidentify are, for example, displaying all the decorative symbols at high speed or displaying a decorative symbol dedicated to an abnormality when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Further, if a big hit game is being played, it is only necessary to display that the big hit game is being played without displaying the number of rounds.

  Also, if the gaming state and the display state during the current presentation are different, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. When a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In addition, what is necessary is just a display of the grade which can recognize that the player produced abnormality about an abnormality alerting | reporting screen. At this time, the execution of the specific effect is stopped if the fluctuation display is executed with the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, and the execution of the specific effect is subsequently performed (scenario lottery even when the continuous prefetching effect is continued). ) Is canceled.

[16-3. When the main control board and peripheral control board are powered off]
When power to the gaming machine is cut off, power is supplied from the backup power source to the main control board 4100, and the contents stored in the RAM are held for a predetermined period. As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied again to the gaming machine, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, when the gaming state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and the game is not in a stopped state such as a waiting state for the customer, the peripheral control board 4140 provides notification that the power supply has been cut off. After performing the above, it is switched to a production that does not give misunderstanding to the player such as waiting for customers. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In this case, the execution of the specific effect is stopped when the fluctuation display is executed with the pseudo continuous change or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, and the execution of the specific effect is subsequently performed (scenario lottery even when the continuous prefetching effect is continued). ) Is canceled.

[16-4. Summary at power off]
With the configuration as described above, even if the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether or not the execution of the change display is continued with a pseudo continuous change or a story reach change pattern. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

[17. General-purpose look-ahead production]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetching effect (ordinary pattern prefetching effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is executed. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the routine prefetch effect control process in the present embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of the universal prefetching effect of the present embodiment.

  When the ordinary figure prefetching effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the normal symbol prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type prefetch effect command is received. When the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program ends this process because the ordinary figure prefetching effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect is currently being executed (step S1201). S2202). In the case where the normal-reading effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the processing after step S2207 is executed in order to continue the normal-reading effect that is being executed.

  When the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition for the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is satisfied (step S2203). Whether or not the execution condition for the ordinary-look-ahead effect is established is determined according to, for example, the game state or the execution status of another effect. When the execution condition of the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this process.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the timing which performs a usual map prefetch effect is not specifically limited. For example, it may be executed independently of the execution state of the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol synchronization effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 83A, even when the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, as shown in FIG. Further, the execution timing of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, even when the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the ordinary figure prefetching effect may be executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type prefetching effect command) for instructing execution of a general symbol prefetching effect is received from 4100 from the main control board, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general symbol prefetching effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that a player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is being executed, or when a special effect is being executed during execution of a general map prefetch effect, As a failure, execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect may be restricted. Further, in order to prevent a plurality of types of notice effects from being executed at the same time, when a special lottery pre-read notice effect is being executed, the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side is restricted to perform the normal lottery look-ahead notice effect. Also good.

  In the pre-drawing effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a star-shaped pre-reading effect region is displayed in the upper right part of the screen, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner within the region ( FIG. 83 (C)). As a result of the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the win (“To”, FIG. 83 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the deviation (“−”, FIG. 83 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the regular drawing lottery Is notified. The player may launch a game ball aiming at the lower start opening 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the winning in the normal drawing pre-reading effect area stops. In addition, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to launch the game ball aiming at the lower start port 2102. At this time, in order to ensure the time for the player to launch aiming at the lower start opening 2102, the result of the general-purpose prefetching effect is displayed before a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the normal lottery, it is usually set according to the advantage for the player (ease of winning the game ball to the lower start port 2102). It may be determined whether or not an execution condition for drawing pre-reading effects is satisfied. For example, as the movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the movable piece 2106 is set to be moved many times. At this time, only in the case of a movable mode advantageous to the player, such as long release, the general-purpose prefetching notice may be executed.

  In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than the winning combinations may be defined, and the stop symbols may be set according to the degree of expectation that the normal lottery is a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. When the movable drawing 2106 moves in the long open mode as a result of the normal drawing lottery, a stop symbol to be notified as a hit is set, and in the short open mode, it is not a hit or miss. It may be a stop symbol.

  If the normal symbol variation time is short, the normal symbol type pre-reading effect need not be executed. This is because the winning probability is high, and even if the result of the normal lottery is announced, there is little profit for the player, and the variation time of the normal symbol is short, so that it is not possible to secure a sufficient time for executing the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect. That is, whether or not to execute the general-purpose prefetching effect may be determined according to the gaming state.

  When the execution condition for the ordinary drawing prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the ordinary drawing prefetching effect region (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variably displaying the symbols in the general-purpose prefetching effect, a general-purpose prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the general-purpose prefetching effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the normal-picture pre-reading effect timer expires may be fixed, may depend on the gaming state, may vary according to the normal symbol variation time, or may be a combination thereof.

  Further, when the ordinary drawing prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the ordinary figure prefetching effect timer has expired (step S2207). If the normal prefetch effect timer has not expired (the result of step S2207 is “no”), this processing ends to continue the normal prefetch effect.

  On the other hand, the effect control program stops the display of the changing symbols in order to display the pre-reading result of the general drawing lottery when the time limit of the general-purpose pre-reading effect timer expires (the result of step S2207 is “Yes”) ( Step S2208). Finally, the general-purpose prefetching effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this process ends.

  Although the above-described general-purpose prefetching effect has been executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, it may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition to displaying on the display device, the general-purpose lookahead effect is executed by multiple effect devices, such as operating a movable accessory, causing a light emitter such as a lamp to emit light, and outputting sound from a speaker. It may be possible, and may be a combination of these production devices. When executing the pre-reading prescription effect in combination with a plurality of effect devices, the general-purpose pre-reading effect is executed by any one of the plurality of effect devices, in addition to the case of simultaneously executing by a plurality of effect devices. May be. For example, when performing a general-purpose pre-reading effect by screen display and voice output, a state in which the general-purpose pre-reading effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, when another (pre-reading) effect is being executed during error notification) In the case of (), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the ordinary drawing pre-reading effect by voice output is executed. In addition, instead of restricting the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, the general-purpose prefetching effect may be executed overlapping with other effects. In this case, the effect mode of the general-purpose prefetching effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made translucent to execute the usual map pre-reading effect, or the sound may be output with the volume reduced.

[18. Effect]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by continuously changing the range of the random number value according to the gaming state or the like, continuous production without contradiction is performed, such as preventing falling without complicating the control. can do.

  Further, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag and the random number initial value for executing the specific effect are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the supply of power is interrupted during the performance, and the performance cannot be continued.

  In addition, when there is a start winning that generates a big hit or a small hit during the performance, there is a start winning that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectation) Even when the state (game mode) transition condition is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variation display based on the winning of the game ball at the lower start opening 2102 described above is executed in preference to the case where the winning display is won at the upper start opening 2101, the result of the variation display executed with priority is given. When the initialization condition such as big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being interrupted due to the occurrence of a big hit or a change in the gaming state, and being resumed in a halfway state.

  Further, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling but also to execute an effect that is executed continuously and has order.

  For example, you may apply when selecting the production | presentation for every round in a jackpot game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the jackpot game, or the contents of the effect may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every three rounds in the 15-round jackpot game). Further, a common effect may be executed up to a midway round (for example, 7 of 15 rounds), and the content of the effect may be selected for subsequent rounds (for example, after 8 rounds). At this time, for example, if the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes the start memory that is a big hit, select an effect pattern in which a special effect is likely to be executed, and It may be suggested (notified) to the player.

  As described above, the feature of the present invention is that it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating control by dynamically changing the range of the random value according to the gaming state or the like. Become.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to maintain a notice lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of specific effects in story reach, pseudo-continuous variation, and continuous prefetch effects, an increase in storage capacity accompanying diversification of effects Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special figure look-ahead (judgment / direction)]
Here, a description will be given of the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetching determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect.

[19-1. Control on the main control board side (prohibition of special figure prefetch determination)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIG. 84 and FIG. 85 are an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure prefetching among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 84 is an example of a table showing a modification of the command “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 synchronization effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 synchronization effect related” described above in FIG. It is an example of the table which shows details. The description of the same configuration as described above is omitted.

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect. Here, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower start is performed based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to “02H”.

  Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing at which the special symbol 1 holding number changes (the increase timing of the holding number (starting memory number) due to a game ball winning to the upper starting opening 2101 or the upper special symbol display 1185) The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the timing of decreasing the number of holdings due to the variable display), and if the number of special symbol 1 holdings increases (when the game ball wins the upper start port 2101), the special symbol A 1-hold number designation command was sent. Accordingly, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of reserved number information, and mode values “00H” to “04H” are set in accordance therewith. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command notifies not only the number of reservations at the time of increase but also the presence or absence of a pre-reading effect. The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command indicates “prefetching” information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is “1”, and indicates “no prefetching” information when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. Represents. When the special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is “prefetched”, it also plays a role of instructing the start of the prefetch effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 84), the command transmitted is different when the number of special symbol 1 hold is decreased (at the start of fluctuation) and increased (at the start opening prize). The special symbol 1 storage command indicating the number of held balls at the timing at which the number of special symbols 1 held decreases (decrease timing of the number of holdings due to fluctuation display in the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, the start timing of the fluctuation display. Is sent. Therefore, the fluctuation starting special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holdings decreases has 0 to 3 pieces of holding number information, and mode values “01H” to “04H” are set in accordance with this. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of reserved special symbols 1 increases (the timing of increase in the number of reserved balls due to winning a game ball to the upper start port 2101), a special symbol 1 storage pre-read command at the time of pre-reading indicating the number of reserved balls and presence / absence of pre-reading is transmitted. The Therefore, the pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-read command transmitted when the hold number increases has 1 to 4 hold number information, and mode values “* 2H” to “* 5H” are set accordingly. The upper 4 bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” when “no prefetching” and “1” when “prefetching”. The setting of the presence / absence information of prefetching is performed in the processing of step S242 ("no prefetching") and the processing of step S280 ("prefetching present") in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 86) described later. The pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the setting of status value and mode value constituting the command is the same. Different. Note that the special symbol 2 storage command at the start of variation and the special symbol 2 storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Also, only when there is prefetching (that is, when the first address of the prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command mode value is “1”), the symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type A look-ahead command is sent. In the modified example, a change sorting table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process for setting transmission of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 86, the storage prefetch process of the modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the process which is common in the above-mentioned storage prefetch process (FIG. 24), and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, the change sorting table information prefetch command is transmitted when the prefetch determination is performed. Accordingly, the main control MPU 4100a sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). In some cases, the change distribution table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the command acquired in the process of step S284 is the special symbol storage prefetch command for prefetching of the corresponding special figure (FIG. 84). As described above, the pre-read special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-read command has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

  Returning to FIG. The symbol type prefetching command is different from the special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S250, FIG. 27) and special symbol determination processing (step S252, FIG. 28) of the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 86). This command specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation, As a command for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit, there is a special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  The mode values of the symbol type look-ahead command (FIG. 84) and the special symbol 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 85) are associated with outlier or jackpot symbol types 0 to 48. In the symbol type prefetch command, the mode value “01H” is set for the loss, the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for each symbol type with respect to the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and not specified The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each symbol type for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating non-specific big hits (small hits). .

  As described above, the variation pattern prefetch command is a command for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern). The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by using the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination processing (step S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 86). Use to set. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set a production mode from a plurality, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed production content (production pattern) according to the set production mode.

  The variation type look-ahead command is a command for designating information (time addition value) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous variation on a set variation pattern. The time addition value is set using a variation type random number in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage prefetch process (FIG. 86). If it is determined by the variation type random number that pseudo continuous variation is not performed, the variation time of the set variation pattern is maintained. Further, when it is determined that the pseudo continuous variation is performed by the variation type random number, the pseudo continuous variation according to the variation type (any of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern is performed by the variation type random number. The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the time addition value is associated with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation, the time addition value is set by determining the number of executions for each type. Therefore, when pseudo continuous variation is performed, the variation time set in the variation pattern is extended.

  The change distribution table information prefetch command is a command for designating a change distribution table used for determining a change pattern in the change pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of change. As described above, in the fluctuation distribution table, the big hit fluctuation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit (“yes” in step S350) is out of place, but a reach effect is performed (step The reach fluctuation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372) and the deviation fluctuation selection information table used for the case where the reach effect is not performed and the reach effect is not performed (“no” in step S372). Non-reach distribution table) is provided. The fluctuation distribution table at the start of fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (start-up memory) having a reach determination random number that may change the result of reach determination as to whether or not the reach effect is performed when the number of held balls changes between pre-read and start of fluctuation. ).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of the merit of transmitting the change sorting table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands. FIG. 87 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table, and (B) depending on the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. 3 is an example of a reach execution availability table.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, the big hit determination is performed by the big hit determination random number, and when the big hit is reached, the big hit distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is out of reach, the reach determination is performed by the reach determination random number. In reach determination, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the random number for reach determination is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the random number for reach determination is larger than the comparison value. Is set. Thereafter, the effect mode is determined from the random number for variation pattern 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the random number for variation pattern 2 in the effect mode.

  In reach determination, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold value) varies according to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and that the comparison value is incremented by 10 every time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set even if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the reach determination result differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Accordingly, the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes “01H” when the big hit determination result is a big hit, and “02H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 when the big hit determination result is lost, and the reach determination random number. Is set to “03H” when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, and “04H” is set.

  In this way, by transmitting the fluctuation allocation table information prefetch command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of prefetching, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the prefetching and the fluctuation starting time with respect to the hold of the mode value “03H”. It is possible to execute pre-reading effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of reach determination may differ when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. In the storage prefetch process (FIG. 86), when the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is “03H”, the process of setting the pending command reference value when prefetch is present in step S280 is not performed. You may make it maintain the state which set the pending command reference value at the time of no prefetch of S242. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs the prefetch determination but does not transmit the prefetch determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, a special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command “No prefetch” is transmitted to the peripheral control board. Thereby, the pre-reading effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 memory prefetch command (special symbol 2 memory prefetch command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when winning the game ball to the upper start opening 2101 (lower start opening 2102) is reserved. Information on whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect is included together with the number of balls information (“pre-read” or “no pre-read”). And, only when “pre-reading is present”, the symbol type pre-reading command, the variation pattern pre-reading command, the variation type pre-reading command, and the variation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and when “prefetching is not performed”, these prefetching commands are not transmitted. . If the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives only the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) transmitted when the start opening prize is generated, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the prefetch effect without waiting for reception of other prefetch commands. It can be determined whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of “prefetching” (when specific game information is received), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives other prefetch commands or prefetch effects. The execution flag is set (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) to execute the process (first pre-process) that establishes the execution condition of the prefetch effect, and then the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 42). Step S1027, second pre-processing) is executed, and a prefetch effect is executed. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a special symbol 1 storage prefetch command (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command) of “no prefetch”, it can grasp that the prefetch command is not transmitted later. It is possible to immediately make a decision not to execute the prefetch effect (without setting the prefetch effect execution flag) without waiting for the reception of the prefetch command. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetch effect control process (FIG. 76) as the second preprocess without executing the first preprocess, and the prefetch effect execution flag is set. Since there is no (“No” in step S2001), the special figure prefetch effect control process is terminated without executing the prefetch effect.

  Further, when the pre-reading determination is not performed on the main control board 4100 side (when the “no pre-reading” command is received), commands necessary for setting the pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board 4140 (design type pre-reading command, change Since the pattern pre-read command, variation type pre-read command and variation distribution table information pre-read command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the start opening prize (pre-read) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the pre-read effect. It is possible to prevent erroneous control. In addition, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit the pre-reading presence / absence information to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure of the pre-reading effect that may occur in the progress of the game. Implementation can be facilitated. Note that the condition for setting “no prefetch” to the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command (that is, the condition that the main control board 4100 prohibits prefetching) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the symbol type prefetch command transmitted at the time of winning the start opening (at the time of prefetching) sets different mode values for specific big jackpot types (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A common mode value is set for the non-specific big hit (second specific result) which is a so-called small hit without the operation of the device regardless of the type of the non-specific big hit. That is, when the prefetch determination result is a specific big hit (first specific result), the main control board 4100 transmits a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific big hit can be specified. However, if the prefetch determination result is a non-specific big hit (second specific result), a command (second specific information) in which the mode value is unified so that the non-specific big hit type cannot be specified is transmitted. In the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, different non-specific big hits are set for different non-specific big hit types. As a result, since the type of hold that is a non-specific big hit, which is a so-called small hit, cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of fluctuation, the type of small hit is given to the player from the pre-reading effect of the hold. There is no fear of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  For example, there is provided a V-zone winning structure for two kinds of feathers in which a big winning opening is opened in response to a small hit and a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening. In pachinko machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area differs depending on the type of small hit. That is, whether or not the big hit can be derived is determined according to the type of the small hit. Further, since the types of jackpots that are derived according to the types of jackpots are different, the benefits that the player can acquire (such as the number of times reduced by time) are different. For this reason, the small hit type information becomes more important for the player. If such a pachinko machine performs a look-ahead effect that can grasp the type of the small hit, the player can make a decision according to the type of the small hit and easily aim for the big hit or a specific privilege. Therefore, by preventing the pre-reading effect according to the small hit type from being executed, no predictable element (information) is given to the player until the variation is started. Thereby, the fairness of a game can be maintained and the interest of a game can be improved.

[19-1-2. Prohibition conditions for prefetch determination]
FIG. 88 is an example of a table showing conditions under which (A) the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching during state transition.

  In the above-mentioned storage prefetching process (FIG. 86), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing for starting the game ball and the timing at which the variation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or Even if the table does not change, the prefetch determination prohibition period is prohibited (“yes” in step S246), and the prefetch determination is prohibited. When the prefetch determination is prohibited, “no prefetch” is set in the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 88A, when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of starting winning is the probability at the start of variation. This may be the case when the state is different from the state or when the time-saving state at the time of starting winning becomes a non-time-saving state at the start of variation, etc. Indicates when (game number) falls within 4 times. In this case, the prefetch determination is prohibited regardless of the special symbol type.

  When the pre-reading determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the gaming state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 2101 is the short-time state or the condition device is activated. A case where the game state is a big hit game state and a case where the game state at the time of winning a game ball to the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hit game state is shown. In this pachinko machine 1, the game ball winning (special symbol 2 holding occurrence) to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is limited to the short-time state. When the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the start port 2102 is a non-short-time state (a state that is not a short-time state), the prefetch determination is prohibited. In addition, even if a pre-fetch determination is made for a special symbol hold generated during a big hit game, the special symbol is in a normal (low) probability state and a non-time-short state during the big hit game regardless of the previous game state. There is a high possibility that it is different from the gaming state (the gaming state after the big hit game) when the hold is digested, and there is a concern that the accuracy of the prefetch determination may be reduced. For this reason, the pre-reading determination is prohibited even when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (when the special symbol is suspended) is a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B triggered by 100 fluctuations, the number of times the state A is maintained (the remaining number of fluctuations) becomes 4 (97 in the state A). Pre-reading judgment is prohibited at the start of the second fluctuation. The period from the state A to the state B is defined as a prefetch determination prohibition period.

  The winning 1 generated immediately before the 97th change in the state A is started is digested as the 97th change unless all the reserved memory areas 1 to 4 are reserved, but the reserved memory areas 1 to 3 are reserved. If there are, they are stored in the reserved storage areas 2 to 4 as the second to fourth holds, respectively. Then, it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuation. Further, if the hold is stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4, an overflow prize is won and not stored.

  In this way, the winning 1 is changed in the state A even if the change digestion is slow. When there is no state transition between winning and starting change, the pre-read information (big hit determination result, variation pattern, etc.) determined by winning is not different from the variation information determined at the start of variation. However, winning 2 that occurs after winning 1, that is, after winning the 97th change in state A, may change state between winning and changing depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning. . When the number of held balls at the time of winning 2 is 3, and the winning 2 is stored in the holding memory 4 area as the fourth hold, even if the winning state is state A, the state B at the start of variation It becomes. In this case, the pre-read information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of variation are different from each other in the preconditions for various determinations, and may not be the same. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous to the player than the state B, the pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading information is actually a low-expectation variation even though the high-expectation effect was performed. An event can occur that greatly discourages the player.

  Therefore, the period in which the state transition can occur between the winning time and the starting time of the change depending on the number of reserved balls when the winning occurs, that is, the state from the state A after the 100th time changing after the start of the 97th time changing in the state A ends. Prefetching is prohibited during the period until the transition to B. In this way, the pre-reading effect is not performed when the period until the change pattern selection table is changed is a predetermined period (here, the remaining number of times of remaining state is changed by 4). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by executing an excessive (divergence) pre-reading effect as compared with actual fluctuations, and to increase the reliability of the pre-reading effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Note that the state transition includes transition from a high probability state to the normal probability state by digestion of the ST number, transition from the short-time state to the non-short-time state by digestion of the short time, state transition by transition of the production mode according to the number of fluctuations, and the like. It is done. When the table for selecting the variation pattern may change between winning (pre-reading) and starting variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a won the peripheral control MPU 4150a without performing the pre-reading determination. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting port and information without prefetching are transmitted.

  When the main control MPU 4100a performs such read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally knows the remaining number of time reductions when, for example, a power interruption occurs during the time reduction state and power is restored. Since this is not possible, it becomes possible to execute the pre-reading effect that was prohibited after power recovery. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern differs between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. Further, the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of fluctuations in the time reduction state (time reduction number), but the time reduction number information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information indicating the short-time state, but cannot grasp the progress status (the remaining number of short-time times) in the short-time state. For this reason, even if the pre-reading effect is to be prohibited when the remaining short time count before the transition from the short time state to the non-short time state becomes 4 or less, the determination cannot be made, and the short time state ends after the power recovery. I had to ban prefetching until. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs prefetch prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform pre-reading determination when the remaining short time count before the state transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is 4 times (predetermined number) or less. Not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform a prefetch effect. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the pre-reading effect during the time-saving state in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power interruption occurs during the time-saving state and power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period during which the pre-reading effect is not performed, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the description of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command (FIG. 84, FIG. 87), when the mode value is “03H”, the reach determination result is obtained when the number of held balls fluctuates between prefetch and start of fluctuation. It has been mentioned above that there is a possibility that the table for selecting the variation pattern may change. Whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern may change depending on the result of reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is determined in advance, these values can be acquired without setting a fluctuation sorting table information prefetch command by prefetch determination. In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a prefetch target before executing the prefetch determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage prefetch processing (FIG. 86). If there is a possibility that either the reach or non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step 244).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, the special symbol 2 hold is prioritized over the special symbol 1 hold, and each of the upper limit can be held and stored up to 4 pieces. Prefetching is prohibited when the remaining 4 times or less, but is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to change the frequency | count of a determination threshold value (here 4 times) according to the specification applied to the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Further, the control that does not execute the special figure prefetch determination performed on the main control board side described above may be a control that does not perform the special figure prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special drawing look-ahead effect)]
Next, the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

  In the above description, the special figure prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described. However, the prefetching prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of problems related to the prefetching effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from power interruption, the main control MPU 4100a can grasp power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot grasp it. When there is a hold when the power interruption occurs, the main control MPU 4100a transmits information on the number of reserved balls to the peripheral control board 4140, but pre-read information (result information, fluctuation pattern, etc.) for the number of reserved balls is pre-read. Command contents) are not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the pre-reading effect for the on-hold hold that has been put on hold when the power is cut off. In addition, pre-read information for the hold generated after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, but there is a concern about the execution of the pre-read effect of the hold generated after the power recovery until all the power-on hold is consumed.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is a high probability state and the power-on hold includes a low-probability per-hold, the main control MPU 4100a determines the pre-reading determination of the hold generated after the power recovery. Execution is performed in a high probability state, but the probability state is changed from a high probability state to a low probability state by the corresponding variable execution. That is, it is a low probability state when a hold generated after power recovery is digested. Therefore, even if the hold-ahead pre-production effect that occurred after the power recovery is a highly expected effect, the change effect of the hold may be a normal disapproval effect, which will significantly disappoint the player's expectation. There is a risk of deteriorating interest.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even after receiving the special drawing pre-read command until the predetermined number of times (eight times) after the power is turned on including the power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold. Further, as described above, the prefetch effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command is “03H”. Below, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the first modification will be described.

  Also, as a second modification, if there is an unknown hold (power-on hold) when the power is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even if it receives the special figure pre-read command until the unknown hold is consumed. To do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the pre-read special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-read command, not only in the gaming state, but treats the hold of the command as unknown hold and similarly The prefetch effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is consumed. Below, with reference to FIGS. 91-94, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the periphery control MPU4150a of the modification 2 is demonstrated.

[19-2-1. Modification 1 (Preventing pre-reading for the predetermined number of fluctuations when the power is turned on)]
First, Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the first modification. The processes common to the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch prohibition count process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

  As described above, in the reception command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and the process corresponding to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an 8 variable pre-reading prohibition flag after input and other flags corresponding to the command ( In step S1422), the received command analysis process is terminated. After the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, first, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (production start and game state instructions) corresponding to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140 when the main control board 4100 is turned on. Therefore, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 after power-on is a power-on state command.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch prohibition count process (step S1430) when the read command is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). Thereafter, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the prefetch prohibition count process will be described. The prefetching prohibition counting process is a process for making a setting so that it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started eight times after the power is turned on even when a special figure prefetching command is received.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the 8 variation prefetching prohibition flag after setting is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set to the prefetch prohibition count of the subtraction method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). Thereafter, the 8 variation prefetch prohibition flag is canceled after the input (step S1433). This completes the setting of the prefetch prohibition count when the first special symbol variation display game is started after the power is turned on.

  In addition, if the eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag after setting is not set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to processing in step S1434 described later.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is decremented by 1 and updated (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count process is terminated as it is.

  Explain along the passage of time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → Step S1432 → Step S1433 is executed in Step S1431 when the first fluctuation starts, and a prefetch prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is set. Thereafter, the processing of No → Step S1435 is executed in Step S1434, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the start of the second fluctuation, the process of No → Step S1435 is executed in Step S1431, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “6”. Similar processing is repeated at the start of the third to eighth fluctuations, and the prefetch prohibition count becomes “0” at the start of the eighth fluctuation. Therefore, at the time of the subsequent fluctuation start, the process of No → Step S1434 is repeated in Step S1431.

  Thus, in the prefetch prohibition count process, the value of the prefetch prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after power-on are linked and linked so that it is possible to determine whether or not the prefetch prohibition state is in effect from the prefetch prohibition count value. .

  Returning to FIG. Peripheral control MPU 4150a uses a special figure pre-reading effect command (special design 1 when pre-reading with pre-read 1 (2) storage pre-read command, pre-read symbol type pre-read command, pre-read variation pattern pre-read command, pre-read variable type pre-read command , A pre-reading variable distribution table information command) (Yes in step S1407), the ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) having the status value “69H” and the mode value “03H” as the special figure pre-reading effect command. It is determined whether or not a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command indicating "." Is received (step S1441). If the ambiguous command is received (Yes in step S1441), the prefetch effect is not executed, and the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, if it has received a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the prefetch prohibition count is It is determined whether or not “0” (step S1442). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), since the fluctuation has not started eight times after the power is turned on (prefetching prohibition state), the prefetching effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

  In addition, when the prefetch prohibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a has already started the eight fluctuations after the power is turned on. The figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetch effect in the special figure prefetch effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 76) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to

  As described above, in the prefetching effect prohibition control according to the first modification, after the power is turned on, the prefetching effect is not performed until a predetermined number of start of fluctuations, which is the upper limit number of suspensions, is executed. For this reason, the hold at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetch effect of the hold that occurs after the power is restored. Therefore, the above-described problems can be solved, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed and an appropriate prefetching effect can be provided. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set as the total number of reserved upper limits for the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the prefetch effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of power interruption is surely consumed (starting fluctuation).

  Although the pre-reading effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on due to power recovery after power interruption. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on in which RAM clear is executed by the main control board 4100. A command that distinguishes both is transmitted from the main control board 4100, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two for simplicity of processing. However, prohibiting pre-reading until the RAM is cleared when no problem occurs may cause a decrease in the fun of the game. Therefore, it may be determined whether or not the RAM is being cleared in the peripheral control board 4140, and if the RAM is being cleared, the prefetch effect may be permitted. In this way, by canceling the prohibition of unnecessary prefetching effects, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game and provide appropriate prefetching effects.

  For example, when the probability state after the power recovery is a high probability state and the power-on hold includes a low-probability per-hold, the main control MPU 4100a determines the pre-reading determination of the hold generated after the power recovery. Execution is performed in a high probability state, but the probability state is changed from a high probability state to a low probability state by the corresponding variable execution. That is, it is a low probability state when a hold generated after power recovery is digested. Therefore, even if the hold-ahead pre-production effect that occurred after the power recovery is a highly expected effect, the change effect of the hold may be a normal disapproval effect, which will significantly disappoint the player's expectation. There is a risk of deteriorating interest.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (prefetching prohibited until unknown pending digestion)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the second modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the same process as the received command analysis process (FIG. 89) of the modification 1, and description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of an unknown input flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure prefetch execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the holding when power is turned on (holding during power interruption) in the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as “unknown hold” in which the prefetch information for executing the prefetch effect is unknown. And pre-reading production is prohibited until the unknown hold is consumed.

  With reference to FIG. 91, the received command analysis process of the modification 2 is demonstrated. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets an unknown flag at the time of input for setting a prefetch prohibition (unknown flag) due to an unknown hold when the command read out in the process of step S1402 is a power-on state command (Yes at step S1421). Processing is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the unidentified flag setting process (step S <b> 1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds the special figure 1 hold count (unknown hold count) and special 2 hold count (unknown hold) to the special 1 unknown count and special 2 unknown count of the subtraction method provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, respectively. Number) is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from the occurrence of power interruption, the number of suspensions at power interruption is set as power recovery information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 1 unknown count is “0” (step S1452). If the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), a special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of prefetch effect of special 1 hold is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. To do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power interruption, or that the initial start is not at the time of power recovery Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1454), a special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of pre-reading effect of special 2 hold is set (step S 1455), and an unknown flag setting process at the time of input is performed. Exit. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply or that the initial start is not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set and the unknown flag setting process is terminated.

  In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, prefetch effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) based on the presence or absence of unknown hold is performed for each special symbol according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power interruption, a pre-reading effect prohibition setting of a special symbol that is a target of the hold at the time of power interruption is performed.

  Returning to FIG.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460) when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). Thereafter, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process for determining whether to cancel the prefetch prohibition (clear the unknown flag) by digesting the unknown hold. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol that is subject to change is subtracted to determine whether or not to hold the unknown pending (preemption of prohibition of pre-reading effects), and if it is digested, the unknown flag (prohibition of pre-reading effects) is cancelled. .

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the unknown symbol of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). If the unknown flag of the target special figure is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the unknown flag of the target special figure is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special figure by 1 (step S1462), and updates the target special figure. It is determined whether or not the unknown count in the figure is “0” (step S 1463). If the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S 1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S 1464), and the unknown count process is terminated.

  In this way, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is consumed (the number of held balls when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating whether there is an unknown hold. When the value of becomes "0", the unknown flag is canceled. As a result, in a special figure prefetch execution determination process (step S1470 in FIG. 91, FIG. 94), which will be described later, it is possible to determine whether the prefetch is prohibited from the state of the unknown flag, and to determine whether or not execution of the prefetched holding effect that has occurred is possible. To be able to.

  Returning to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the interruption at the time of power interruption but also the holding when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 is handled as “unknown holding”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of unknown hold (prefetching effect prohibition setting) is not limited to when the power is turned on, but prefetching of the hold (game ball winnings to the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102) that occurs after the power is turned on. It is also performed when a command is received.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the command read out in the process of step S1402 is a pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command indicating the number of held balls at the start opening winning and the presence or absence of the pre-reading information generated. In step S1469, Yes), special figure prefetch execution determination processing is executed (step S1470). In the special figure prefetch execution determination process, the unknown flag for each special symbol is set (prefetch effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of prefetch information of the received command, or the prefetch effect is executed according to the state of the prefetch information and the unknown flag. Set flags.

  Details of the special figure prefetch execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is a special symbol 1 command (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is “prefetched” (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the top of the mode value of the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “1”.

  If the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is not “prefetched” (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines other prefetch commands (prefetching symbol type prefetch command, prefetch variation pattern). Since the prefetch command, prefetch variation type prefetch command, prefetch variation distribution table information command) is unknown pending that is not transmitted from the main control board 4100, a special 1 unknown flag prohibiting the special prefetch effect is set (step S1473a), At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination process is terminated. If the special 1 unknown flag is already set, the set state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the process of rewriting the special 1 unknown count value to a new reserved ball number value in the process of step S1474a. Do. It is updated so that the digestion of a new unknown hold in the storage order always becomes a cancellation condition for prohibition of prefetching production.

  On the other hand, peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the received pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “pre-read” (Yes in step S1472a), other pre-read commands are transmitted from main control board 4100. Then, it is determined whether or not “6903H” (ambiguous command) is received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process in step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 89) of the first modification. When the ambiguous command is received, that is, when the prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command of “6903H” is received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends.

  Further, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, has received a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of a mode value other than “03H” (No in step S1475a), a special control is performed. It is determined whether or not the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), since the special 1 prefetch effect execution is prohibited, the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends.

  Further, when the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in the process of permitting the special 1 prefetch effect, and therefore executes the special figure prefetch effect that instructs execution of the special 1 prefetch effect. The flag is set (step S1477a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination process ends. When the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetch effect in the special figure prefetch effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 76) executed in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to

  In the process of step S1471, when the prefetched special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetching command is not for the special symbol 1, that is, the command for the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1477b to be executed is obtained by changing the target to the special symbol 2 from the processing of steps S1472a to S1477a for the special symbol 1 described above.

  In the special figure prefetch execution determination process, when a prefetching special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command is received, the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set and the target unknown symbol is used until the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted. Prohibition of special symbol prefetching. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the target special symbol unknown flag is set. Further, even when the received prefetch fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetch effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control of the second modification, the power interruption hold received as the power recovery information when the power is turned on is set as “unknown hold”, and the prefetch effect is not executed even if the power is restored. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when the prefetch information (specific game information) is not transmitted and there is a hold where the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot specify the prefetch determination result), the special symbol of the target until the unknown hold is consumed. The pre-reading effect is not performed. If the unknown hold is digested, the prefetch effect is permitted. For this reason, the suspension (unknown suspension) at the time of power interruption does not affect the prefetching effect after the power recovery. In addition, since a prohibition period for prefetch effects is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown holds, more appropriate prefetch effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a pre-reading effect and a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Also, when receiving a pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set as “unknown hold”, and the pre-reading in the target special symbol is performed until the unknown hold is consumed. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing this prefetch effect prohibition control together with the aforementioned prefetch determination prohibition control at the time of state transition by the main control board 4100, a more appropriate prefetch effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the short-time state to the non-time-short state during the state transition described above, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination if the remaining number of times of the short-time state is less than 4 fluctuations. For this reason, the special symbol 2 hold generated during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an unknown hold. Therefore, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-short-time state after the state transition until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of 4) generated in the short-time state of the remaining 4 changes is digested. And in the pachinko machine 1 of special symbol 2 priority digestion, the special symbol 2 of unknown pending is digested before the special symbol 1 after the state transition. In this way, the hold generated during the four fluctuations immediately before the transition state is not subject to the prefetch determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the hold that can be prefetched is received until the hold is digested on the peripheral control board 4140 side. By not using the pre-reading effect as well, execution of the pre-reading effect during a period in which defects are likely to occur can be prohibited. Note that the suspension that occurs in the non-short-time state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 suspension. At this time, since the prefetch effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, the special symbol 2 is reserved. Therefore, execution of the pre-reading effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time-saving state is not prevented.

  Moreover, in the modification 2, the prefetch effect prohibition control with respect to unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power interruption is performed at the timing when the number of hold changes. Specifically, the prefetch effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving the special symbol 1 (2) stored prefetch command (unknown command) when prefetching without prefetching, and the unknown pending corresponding to the unknown command is digested and starts changing. Released at the timing of In this way, the prefetch effect is prohibited when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, and the prefetch effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown hold is consumed. Therefore, more accurate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed, and a decrease in pre-reading effect and game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, as described in the first modification, the prefetch effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power may not be targeted at the time of RAM clear. In this case, a determination process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above-described input time unknown flag setting process (FIG. 92), and when the RAM clear command is received (at the time of RAM clear) It is only necessary to end the unknown time flag setting process without executing the process. Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150cac in order to share control between when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. As described above, when the RAM is cleared, by controlling so as to allow the prefetching effect, it is possible to eliminate the prohibition of unnecessary prefetching effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game and provide an appropriate prefetching effect. .

  Also, in Modification 1 and Modification 2, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading variable distribution table information command with a mode value of “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for a generated hold with pre-read. However, this is not limited to the pre-reading effect. For example, in the second modification, the pre-reading effect may be prohibited in response to the occurrence of a hold that becomes a non-specific hit (small hit) in a high probability state. Specifically, in the above-described special figure prefetch execution determination processing (FIG. 94), when a prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command with prefetch is received (Yes in step S1472a), the small hit (mode value “50H”). )) Symbol type prefetching command (status value “66H”) and a process for determining whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state are added. If the command is received and the command is in a high probability state, the processes of steps S1473a and S1474a may be executed. Here, at the stage of prefetching, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The small hit types include those that return a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state). If a pre-reading effect is performed even after such a small-hold hold that induces a transition to a low-probability state occurs, it occurs after the small-hit hold and becomes a big-hit determination when pre-reading in a high-probability state. When the change starts in the low-probability state in which the holding has shifted to the occasion of the small hit, an event that becomes a deviation determination can occur. At this time, if the winning effect is performed in the pre-reading effect, the actual variation result (out of line) may not only significantly discourage the player's expectation but also cause distrust in the game effect. Therefore, even if a prefetch command with prefetching is received, if the symbol type prefetching command “6650H” for small hits is received in a high-probability state, the change at which the result of the small hit is determined (holding digestion) ) Prohibit prefetching until. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of an excessive (wrong) pre-reading effect with respect to the actual variation result, and inconvenience to the player's performance, and a pre-reading effect. The reliability of can be raised.

[19-2-3. At the start of the big hit game (pre-read information clear)]
By the way, the hold generated during the big hit is prohibited because the main control MPU 4100a does not execute the pre-read determination, but the hold already generated and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the gaming state at the time of occurrence. Pre-read information is obtained by the pre-read determination, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the pre-read effect. However, since the game state after the big hit that is digested (start of fluctuation) at the start of the big hit may be different from the game state at the time of the prefetch determination (the variation pattern table is different), On the other hand, there is a risk that it will not be an appropriate look-ahead effect. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, while clearing the prefetch effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. In this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems that prevent appropriate pre-reading effects. Hereinafter, the control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the aforementioned effect control process (FIG. 49).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first executes a big hit opening display process in response to the big hit start command (step S1710). Next, a display process that displays on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the big prize opening 2003 is opened and a display process during a big hit for performing a display effect (for example, round display etc.) during the big hit game state is executed (step) S1720). Thereafter, a jackpot ending display process for effecting the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed (step S1730), the process selection flag is updated to “0” (step S1740), and the jackpot display process is terminated.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit opening display process. The jackpot opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the aforementioned jackpot display process (FIG. 95).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the process of step S1411 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48). If the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the production information (preliminary information) corresponding to the prefetch command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The notification mode is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 is set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Production control is performed. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the pre-notification mode on the condition that the pre-reading effect information (pre-notification mode) can be specified in a predetermined storage area (pre-notification mode identifiable setting means) and the execution of the big hit game. It also has a function (preliminary notification mode specification impossibility setting means) for setting it as unspecified. The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a again sets the effect information corresponding to the prefetch command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are set to be triggered by the current jackpot (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and then ends the big hit opening display process. Thereafter, upon receiving a big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 when the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit display processing (step S1720 in FIG. 95) is executed.

  In this way, in the big hit opening display process, an effect display indicating the start of the big hit is performed, and the pre-reading pre-production information stored at the time of the big hit starts from the one corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the holding according to the big hit gaming state. Can be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the pre-reading effect information selected under the normal probability state at the time of the occurrence of the hold, and re-reads the pre-reading effect information under the high probability state that can be switched when the jackpot is triggered. Select again. In addition, it is prefetch effect information that is the target of the effect information clear process in step S1712, and the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 (the number of held balls, presence of prefetch, symbol type, variation pattern, variation type). , The distribution table) is held, so that the effect information based on the hold information can be reset in the effect information setting process in the next step S1713. The resetting timing is not limited to the time of starting the big hit. For example, it may be reset before the big hit round finalizing effect. Thereby, it is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in accordance with the situation with respect to the hold at the time of starting the big hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the pre-reading effect and the interest of the game.

  The target of the above-described effect information clear process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Special pattern 1 with prefetching with prefetching from main control board 4100 (2) Even if other prefetching commands are received, abnormal number of pending changes (holding at previous reception) If the number of pending information received this time has increased to 4 even though the number information was 0, the pending production information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when established is the target of the effect information clear process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance a pre-read effect for the hold, and an appropriate pre-read It leads to offer of production.

  The above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetching effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure prefetching determination on the main control board side.

[20. Production mode transition]
By the way, in the above-described received command analysis process (FIGS. 48, 89, 91), if the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 is performed. In this process, the variation pattern reception flag is set. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting the special symbol synchronization effect including the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state among the plurality, the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern received from the main control board 4100 and the winning information (decoration pattern stop pattern, type of reach effect, The determination of whether or not the notice effect can be executed, the notice effect mode, the presence or absence of the extension effect, and the like are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronization effect.

  Concretely, with reference to FIG. 97, an example of the effect transition in the probability variation time-short state in which the number of time reductions is given 64 times is described. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect transition in the probability variation short time state. When the gaming state enters the shortest time at certain change time, the special-synchronization effect (short-time effect) in the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times, and the special B effect mode after 31 times. A synchronized production (probability change production) is executed. In the special figure synchronized production in the specific A production mode, a continuous production is executed as to whether or not the time-saving state is continued in a fluctuation in which the number of time reductions is 10, 20, and 30, and a normal production is executed in other fluctuations. Is done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of time reductions, and sets a variation pattern (a normal effect pattern, a continuous effect pattern, a probability change confirmed effect pattern) corresponding to the number of time reductions as a variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables in accordance with the number of time reductions (number of lottery game executions in the time reduction state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of time reductions. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 97, the variation pattern that is 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times is selected from the table in which the normal performance pattern is set, and the number of times is 10 times. The variation patterns that are 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the variation patterns that are after the time reduction number of 31 times are selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmed effect pattern is set. Further, the continuous effect pattern is provided with a successful effect pattern in which the time-short state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time-short state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations) by following the received variation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when power is cut off. The production mode of each production varies depending on the production mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 97, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode for the time reduction count of 1 to 30, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode for the time limit count of 31 or later.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 98, a description will be given of an effect mode transition process in which not only the effect is determined but also the effect mode transition is executed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received in the above-described decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is exemplified by the transition from the specific A effect mode in FIG. 97 to the specific B effect mode.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a condition for shifting to the specific B effect mode in which the continuous effect (success or failure) is executed every predetermined number of times and the continuous success effect is executed three times. This is a production mode. If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not currently in the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the effect control mode transition process ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern among the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not (step S1752). If the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update is 3 (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). Thereafter, the effect mode transition process ends. The count of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared at the end of the special A effect mode.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when a predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands are received from the main control MPU 4100a, and the specific gaming state (here, the time-saving state) according to the variation pattern commands received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine a transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect mode). Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on a command received from the main control board 4100 side where game information is always backed up, even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when power is cut off, It is possible to execute the appropriate performance at the time of electricity.

  A gaming machine represented by the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be expressed as the following technical idea.

[Technology]
In other words, the gaming machine of this example includes a receiving port that can receive a game ball and lottery means that can execute a lottery based on the reception of the game ball into the receiving port, and the result of the lottery is a specific result. A game machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that an effect image including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and the stop when the symbol is stopped The display means for displaying the result of the lottery according to the mode and the effect image displayed on the display means, from the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols until the result of the lottery is displayed An effect control means having a pseudo continuous effect execution means capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect that temporarily stops the plurality of symbols during the period and restarts the variation of the temporarily stopped symbols. The control means includes the compound There is a quasi-continuous effect execution means for temporarily stopping only a specific symbol during the period from the start of the symbol variation until the result of the lottery is displayed and restarting the variation of the temporarily stopped specific symbol. It is characterized by this.

  More specifically, the gaming machine includes a receiving port that can receive a game ball, and lottery means that can execute a lottery based on the reception of the game ball into the receiving port, and the lottery result is a specific result. A gaming machine in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result, and an effect image including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and when the symbol is stopped Display means for displaying the result of the lottery according to the stop mode, and effect control means for controlling the effect image displayed on the display means, wherein the effect control means starts the variation of the plurality of symbols. Until the result of the lottery is displayed, the symbols are temporarily stopped using a special symbol, and the change of the temporarily stopped symbols is started again to give the player a sense of expectation. Execute pseudo-continuous production that can give In a state in which the variation of the non-specific symbols among the plurality of symbols is maintained between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the result of the lottery. , After temporarily stopping only a specific symbol using the special symbol, the specific symbol is started to change again, so that a pseudo-continuous effect can be given to the player in a shorter time than the pseudo-continuous effect. It has a means. The spider pseudo-continuous effect execution means includes an effect image displayed when the specific symbols are temporarily stopped in the spurious pseudo-continuous effect, and when the plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect. It is more preferable to have a hard-to-see image display control means for displaying a specific image that cannot be distinguished or difficult to distinguish.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to achieve a more efficient performance than the conventional pseudo continuous fluctuation that is required for a long time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 400 Operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device 650 Ball hitting device 740 Prize ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error release unit)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display device 4100 Main control board 4100a Main control MPU
4110 Dispensing control board 4120 Dispensing control unit 4120a Dispensing control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board 4150 Peripheral control part 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control part 4165 RTC control part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A receiving port capable of accepting a game ball; and a lottery means capable of performing a lottery based on the reception of the game ball at the entrance; and a player based on the result of the lottery being a specific result A gaming machine in which an advantageous jackpot game is executed,
An effect image including a variation effect of a plurality of symbols is displayed, and display means for displaying a result of the lottery according to a stop mode when the symbol is stopped,
The effect image displayed on the display means is controlled, and the plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped between the start of the variation of the plurality of symbols and the display of the lottery result. Production control means having pseudo continuous production execution means capable of executing a pseudo continuous production to restart the change of the plurality of stopped symbols again,
The production control means includes
Temporarily stopping only a specific symbol between the start of variation of the plurality of symbols and displaying the result of the lottery, and changing the plurality of symbols even after the specific symbol is temporarily stopped Having continuous production execution means,
A special stage effect configured such that the degree of expectation that the result of the lottery is a specific result varies depending on the stage, and the variation period of the plurality of symbols and the specific symbol before the specific symbol is temporarily stopped The special stage effect can be executed in the fluctuation period of the plurality of symbols after being temporarily stopped,
The special symbol is temporarily suspended in a special stage effect that has a higher degree of expectation than the stage of the special stage effect performed in the variation period of the plurality of symbols before the specific symbol is temporarily stopped. The gaming machine can be executed using a region that overlaps a region in which the specific symbol is temporarily stopped during a later variation period of the plurality of symbols.